JP2018102658A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of making a configuration regarding a specific game state novel.SOLUTION: In winning/losing determination with entry into a through game for a special pattern as an opportunity, a round number is stocked because of a first jackpot result. When a second jackpot result is obtained as a result of winning/losing determination processing with entry into a through game for a game round as an opportunity in a situation where the round number is stocked, the round game is performed for the round number selected when the second jackpot result is obtained. When the round number is not stocked in a state where a round game is executable, or stock of the round number runs out before all the round games for the selected round number are performed, a shift is performed to a round number replenishment period. When a new round number is stocked during the round number replenishment period, a round game is executable again.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained in a lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, a transition is made to a specific gaming state. And when it transfers to a specific game state, opening and closing of the ball-throwing apparatus provided, for example in the game area is started (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the specific gaming state novel, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of making a configuration related to a specific gaming state novel.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is provided with a variable pitching means provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Specific transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the specific gaming state;
In the specific game state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, a predetermined game state is generated in which the variable entry means is in the closed state and ends. Predetermined generating means for causing,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state;
Number-of-times grasping means for grasping the number of times that a predetermined event has occurred based on the fact that a game ball has been launched toward the game area as number-of-times information;
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the number-of-times information has reached end reference information in the standby section;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to make the configuration relating to the specific gaming state novel.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. (A) It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes corresponding to the through gate for game times, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes corresponding to the through gate for game times. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed with MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd fluctuation start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the round number specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a round number lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows the flow until a round game is started. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st image, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd image. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation related process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a time chart which shows the flow in a round game. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a alerting | reporting image. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation | release condition related process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each cancellation | release condition table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st cancellation | release condition specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st cancellation | release period corresponding | compatible process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation corresponding to the design variation start command for production | generation, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a specific production | generation, (c) The production | generation corresponding to the reach command for production | presentation (D) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation corresponding to the stop symbol command for production | generation. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd cancellation | release condition specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd cancellation | release period corresponding | compatible process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination process performed in MPU of the audio | voice light emission control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation | release condition specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st image, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd image, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a cancellation | release image. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the extension related process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation | release condition specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 20 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20, and FIG. 2B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 22 provided on the game board 20.

  The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, a special drawing through gate 23, a game turning through gate 24, a variable display unit 26, a first display unit 33, a second display unit 34, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 21 and the variable winning device 22 is detected, it is detected by various winning detection sensors (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, and a predetermined number of prizes are determined based on the detection results. The ball is paid out.

  In addition, when a ball enters the game turn through gate 24, it is detected by a detection sensor 24b described later provided in the game turn through gate 24, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. Executed.

  In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning holes and the like and game balls that have entered the various through gates 23 and 24 pass through the out port 27. Ejected from the game area. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 for dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the ball entering the out port 27, the game balls to the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the special-purpose through gate 23, and the game turn through gate 24 are shown. Display the winning game as winning.

  The special figure through gate 23 and the game play through gate 24 are arranged so that the special figure through gate 23 and the game play through gate 24 are vertically oriented so that the special figure through gate 23 faces upward. Are lined up. The special view through gate 23 and the game turn through gate 24 have flanges 23a and 24a, respectively, and are fixed to the game board 20 by screws or the like.

  The special-purpose through-gate 23 and the game-turning through-gate 24 are provided with passages for causing the game balls to flow down in the vertical direction. The width of the passage is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. A winning opening for guiding the game ball into the passage is formed in the uppermost stream portion of the passage, and the game ball flowing down in the passage is discharged from the passage at the most downstream portion of the passage. A discharge port is formed.

  A game ball that has won a prize opening of the passage provided in the special-purpose through gate 23 flows down the passage, and the special-design through-gate 23 and the game-through through gate 24 are discharged from the discharge outlet of the passage. Released to the game area that occurs in between. Since nothing is provided in the game area, the flow of the game ball discharged to the game area is not hindered. Further, the distance between the outlet of the passage provided in the special-purpose through gate 23 and the winning opening of the passage provided in the gaming gate 24 is shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the game area generated between the special figure through gate 23 and the game turn through gate 24 from being discharged out of the game area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance between the discharge port of the special-purpose through gate 23 and the winning port of the game turn through gate 24 may be the same or substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. The distance may be longer than the diameter of the game ball.

  Furthermore, the passage outlet provided in the special-purpose through gate 23 and the prize winning opening of the passage provided in the game turning through gate 24 are arranged to face each other. As a result, the game ball released from the outlet of the passage provided in the special-purpose through gate 23 can be surely won in the winning opening of the passage provided in the through gate 24 for gaming. . A game ball that has won a prize opening in a passage provided in the game turn through gate 24 flows down the passage and is discharged from a discharge opening in the passage.

  The through gates 23 and 24 are provided with detection sensors 23b and 24b for detecting a game ball. Specifically, the special figure through gate 23 is provided with a special figure detection sensor 23b, and the game turn through gate 24 is provided with a game turn detection sensor 24b. Each of these detection sensors 23b and 24b outputs an electrical signal to a main controller 60 described later. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  As shown in FIG. 2B, the variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. . The open / close door 22b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 22c provided integrally as the variable winning device 22 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 22c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. Specifically, the big prize opening 22a is normally closed so that game balls cannot be won, and although the details will be described later, the result of the internal lottery based on winning to the game gate through gate 24 is large. When the winning result is such that a game ball is likely to win a winning opening 22a, the large winning opening 22a is switched to an open state.

  In the first display section 33 shown in FIG. 2 (a), the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the special figure through gate 23 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the special display through gate 23 is displayed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning is clearly displayed.

  In the second display unit 34, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the game turn through gate 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the change display, the display is performed based on the winning of the game turn through gate 24. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated by the display.

  In other words, in the present pachinko machine 10, winning in the special drawing through gate 23 and winning in the game turn through gate 24 are distinguished in the internal lottery.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 becomes the winning result in which the right to switch the large winning opening 22a to the open state is stocked. The right to switch the winning opening 22a to the open state is stocked. The stock of the right to switch the special winning opening 22a to the open state is expressed as the number of rounds stocked. The number of rounds is the number of times a round game is executed. In addition, the round game is continued until either one of a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are awarded to the big winning opening 22a is satisfied. It is a game to play.

  In the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the game gate through gate 24 becomes the winning result that can actually digest the number of rounds stocked, so that the big winning opening 22a Switches from a closed state to an open state.

  In the present embodiment, even if the number of rounds is stocked, until the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the game round through gate 24 becomes the winning result that can actually digest the stocked number of rounds. The winning opening 22a is not opened. Further, even if the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the game gate through gate 24 is the result of winning that the number of rounds that have been stocked can actually be digested, if the number of rounds is not stocked, the large winning opening 22a Is not open.

  In addition, although the said 1st display part 33 and the said 2nd display part 34 are comprised by the segment indicator by which a some segment light emission part is arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescent display device, CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the patterns variably displayed on the first display unit 33 and the second display unit 34, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a plurality of types of symbols A configuration in which a character is displayed in a variable manner or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of symbol (or variable display or switching display), and a center frame 32 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 31. Has been. The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 100 described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen G such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix. It may be a display.

  In the symbol display device 31, the symbol variation display is started based on the winning to the through gate 24 for game times. That is, when the variable display is performed on the second display unit 34, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on a winning to the game turn through gate 24, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of a second jackpot result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same numbers are attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is formed. Is done. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, combinations of symbols with the same numbers are determined according to the number of rounds of the round game. Here, there is a high possibility that the player wants to know the number of rounds of the round game early. Therefore, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the symbols of the symbols formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, a holding lamp portion 35 corresponding to the game turn through gate 24 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. The number of game balls that have passed through the game turn through gate 24 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed when the hold lamp unit 35 is turned on.

  An inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42, and is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism performs a game ball launching operation by operating a launch handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with a synthetic resin. Incidentally, the display screen G, the first display unit 33, the second display unit 34, and the like of the symbol display device 31 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 53.

  Around the window portion 52, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 54 is provided above the window part 52 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation are provided.

  Below the window portion 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 that bulge to the near side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device 71 described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 57a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 71 mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

  The upper bulging portion 56 is provided with an effect button 58 that is pressed by the player when the symbol is changed or displayed on the display screen G. Since the position where the effect button 58 is provided is on the left side of the firing handle 51, it is easy to press the effect button 58 with the left hand while operating the firing handle 51 with the right hand.

  On the back side of the inner frame, a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100 are mounted. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device 71, a payout control device 70, a power source and a firing control. A device 80 is mounted. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening to the board box that accommodates the main control board 61 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power supply and launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various winning detection sensors 21a and 22d are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In the MPU 62, a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion is performed. In addition, a special-purpose detection sensor 23b and a game-time detection sensor 24b are electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 62. In the MPU 62, various lotteries are executed based on winnings to the special-purpose through gate 23 and the game turn through gate 24.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion.

  Various commands such as a change command and a success / failure result command are output to the sound emission control device 90. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the main control device 60 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The MPU 62 is connected to a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, a first display unit 33, a second display unit 34, and a holding lamp unit 35. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the game ball wins the special figure through gate 23, the display control of the first display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 62, and when the game ball wins the game turn through gate 24, the second display unit in the MPU 62. 34 and the display control of the hold lamp unit 35 are executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 80, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power source and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, the necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 80 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. Electric power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60. The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 92 is electrically connected to the display lamp unit 54, the speaker unit 55, and the display control device 100 on the output side thereof, and drives the display lamp unit 54 and the speaker unit 55 based on a command received from the main control device 60. While controlling, a command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  In addition, an effect button 58 is electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and a command for executing a predetermined effect is generated in accordance with the signal output of the effect button 58, and the symbol display device 31 A command is sent.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105).

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information. The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 105 can be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the first display unit 33, setting of display of the second display unit 34, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the first jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated in response to the winning of the special figure through gate 23, and the winning to the game gate through gate 24 The initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C2 used for the lottery for generating the big jackpot, the reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery for lottery generation when the symbol display device 31 is deviated and changed, and the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 The first random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting and the second random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C2 When, it is set to be used and the change type counter CS to determine the variable display time in the second display portion 34 and a symbol display device 31, the. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CINI2, and CS are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CINI2, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals.

  The information corresponding to the second jackpot random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64a when a winning to the game turn through gate 24 occurs.

  The holding ball storage area 64a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. According to the winning history to the through gate 24 for game times, The combination of the numerical information of the two big hit random number counter C2 and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 is stored as holding information in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the through gate 24 for game times occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 → the second reservation area RE4. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 3 reserved area RE3 → 4th reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four game balls winning histories to the game turn through gate 24 are held and stored. Further, the holding area RE has a holding number storage area NA, and information for specifying the number of the winning history to the through gate 24 for game times is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the second display unit 34, the numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE (the numerical information of the second big hit random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3). The numerical value information) is moved, and when the second display unit 34 changes, whether or not it is determined based on the numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, each jackpot random number counter C1, C2 will be described. For example, the first jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 100, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. In particular, when the first jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first jackpot random number counter C1. The first random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the first big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 100). The first jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 is read at the timing when the game ball wins the special-purpose through gate 23.

  Next, the second jackpot random number counter C2 will be described. For example, the second jackpot random number counter C2 is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 399, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the second jackpot random number counter C2 makes one round, the value of the second random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second jackpot random number counter C2. The second random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second big hit random number counter C2 (value = 0 to 399). The second jackpot random number counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64a at the timing when the game ball wins the game turn through gate 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 63a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 63. Here, the contents of the success / failure table which is referred to when the determination of success / failure corresponding to the winning to the special figure through gate 23 is made will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for special drawings.

  In the gaming state in which the special-use determination success / failure table is referred to in the determination of success / failure, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), the number of random numbers that are the first jackpot result is 100. As a result of the first jackpot result, the right to switch the big winning opening 22a to the open state is stocked.

  Except for the value of the random number that is the first jackpot result, the result of the determination is an outlier result. As described above, as the value of the first big hit random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, one of 0 to 100 is selected. Therefore, when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the special-use success / failure table, the first jackpot result is obtained with a probability of 100/101. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the special-effects success / failure table, the first jackpot result is obtained with a very high probability and the number of rounds is stocked.

  Next, the contents of the success / failure table which is referred to when making a determination of success / failure corresponding to winning in the game turn through gate 24 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7B and 7C. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) corresponding to the game turn through gate 24, and FIG. 7C is a game turn through. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes (high probability success / failure information group) corresponding to the gate. In the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means corresponding to winning through the game turn through gate 24.

  In the game state in which the low / high probability mode determination table is referred to at the time of the above determination, as shown in FIG. 7B, the random number value that is the second jackpot result is one. With the second jackpot result, it is possible to actually digest the number of rounds stocked.

  Except for the value of the random number that is the second jackpot result, the result of the determination is an outlier result. As described above, the value of the second big hit random number counter C2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is selected from 0 to 399. Therefore, when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, the second jackpot result is obtained with a probability of 1/400.

  In the game state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the above-described success / failure determination, as shown in FIG. 7C, the value of the random number that is the second jackpot result is 100. . Except for the value of the random number that is the second jackpot result, the result of the determination is an outlier result. Therefore, when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, the second jackpot result is obtained with a probability of 1/4. In other words, the probability of winning a big hit is higher when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode than when the success / failure determination is made with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Is set. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition which is a high probability mode.

  The value group of the second jackpot random number counter C2 that is the second jackpot result in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the second jackpot random number counter C2 that is the second jackpot result in the situation of the high probability mode. Yes. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers resulting in the second big hit result are arbitrary, and the second big hit in the situation of the low probability mode. The resulting value group of the second jackpot random number counter C2 may be configured such that only a part of the value group of the second jackpot random number counter C2 resulting in the second jackpot result is included in the high probability mode. It is good also as a structure which is not contained.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 64a at the timing when the game ball wins the game turn through gate 24.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining combinations are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In the game times corresponding to the detachment result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation display time on the second display unit 34 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated by a timer interrupt process to be described later, and the value of the variation type counter CS is changed at the time of the variation display result at the start of variation display on the second display unit 34 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31. To be acquired.

  Here, although the details will be described later, the variable display time triggered by winning the special drawing through gate 23 is set to 0.5 sec. Therefore, the value of the variation type counter CS is not acquired at the start of variation display on the first display unit 33.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, a process executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 62 in the main control device 60 will be described. The MPU 62 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. This process is started periodically by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, reading processing of the various winning detection sensors 21a and 22d and the game times detection sensor 24b is executed. Specifically, when a winning is made to the game turn through gate 24, one is added to the counter for three prize balls provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The counter for three prize balls is for counting the number of times a three prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls should be output.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a winning is made to the special-purpose through-gate 23 instead of the game-playing through-gate 24, three prize-ball counters provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are provided. 1 may be added, or when a winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 and the game turning through gate 24 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out for each winning. It is good.

  Further, when a winning is made to the general winning opening 21, 1 is added to the 10 winning ball counters provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The 10-award ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10-award ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out 10 gaming balls should be output.

  Further, when a winning is made to the big winning opening 22a, 1 is added to 15 counters for 15 winning balls provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The counter for 15 prize balls is for counting the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out 15 game balls.

  After executing the process of step S101, the first random number initial value counter CINI1 and the second random number initial value counter CINI2 are updated in step S102. Specifically, the first random number initial value counter CINI1 and the second random number initial value counter CINI2 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In the following step S103, the first big hit random number counter C1, the second big hit random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the first jackpot random number counter C1, the second jackpot random number counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In the subsequent step S104, a winning process is executed and the timer interruption process is terminated. The winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the special figure variation flag of the RAM 64. The special figure variation flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the pattern of the first display unit 33 is being variably displayed in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. When “1” is set in the special figure variation flag, the pattern of the first display unit 33 is in the variation display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S201, it is determined in step S202 whether or not a winning to the special figure through gate 23 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the special figure detection sensor 23b is switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal. As described above, when the special figure detection sensor 23b does not detect the game ball that has passed through the special figure through gate 23, the special figure detection sensor 23b transmits a LOW level signal to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, When a game ball that has passed through the gate 23 is detected, an HI level signal is transmitted to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S202, it is determined in step S203 whether or not the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is greater than “0”. The first round counter RC1 is a counter for specifying the number of rounds stocked by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. When the result of the success / failure determination process based on the winning to the special figure through gate 23 becomes the first jackpot result, the number of rounds is set in the first round counter RC1.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the number of rounds is stocked (when the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”), the stock of the number of rounds The number of rounds will be stocked again after there is no more. Therefore, by providing the processing of step S203, in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, a determination process of the success / failure based on the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 is performed, and the number of rounds before the stock of the number of rounds disappears. It is possible to prevent the stock from being added.

If a negative determination is made in step S203, it is determined in step S204 whether the ending period is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0” and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is greater than “0”. To do. The second round counter RC2 is a counter for specifying how many rounds stocked by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be digested. Details will be described later.
When the second jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process based on the winning to the game turn through gate 24, the number of rounds is set in the second round counter RC2 at the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit 34 is finished. Is done. The ending period is a period during which an ending image for notifying that the upper limit number of round games has ended on the display screen G is displayed. By providing the processing in step S204, it is possible to prevent the display of the first display unit 33 from being changed in the state where the ending image is displayed on the display screen G. .

  According to the present embodiment, when the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is larger than “0”, during the ending period, or when the design of the first display unit 33 is variably displayed. If so, the winning to the special drawing through gate 23 is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the success / failure determination process based on winning in the special-purpose through gate 23 from being performed in the various situations described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S204, the first variation start process is executed in step S205. The first variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. The first change start process is a process related to change display of the first display unit 33. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a first variation start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S301, the value of the first big hit random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is read, and in the subsequent step S302, the first read out in the above step S301 with reference to the special-use decision table. It is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the first jackpot result.

  When the jackpot is won (step S303: YES), a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S304. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the first display unit 33 is specified from the stop result table for the first jackpot result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. Remember.

  In subsequent step S305, "1" is set to the first jackpot flag of the RAM 64. The first jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the first jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process triggered by winning of the special-purpose through gate 23 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  If a negative determination is made in step S303, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed in step S306. Specifically, the information of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first display unit 33 is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the process of step S305 is executed, or when the process of step S306 is executed, “250” is set in the first variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S307. The first variable display time counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the variable display on the first display unit 33 is ended in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. The numerical information set in the first variation display time counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 0.5 sec after the first fluctuation display time counter is set to “250”.

  According to this configuration, the variable display time of the first display unit 33 is set to 0.5 sec. Here, if the variable display time of the first display unit 33 is longer than 0.5 sec, it takes time until the number of rounds is stocked. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the variable display time of the first display unit 33 is set to 0.5 sec, it is possible to prevent the time required for the number of rounds from being stocked from becoming long. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent annoyance that the number of rounds is not easily stocked from accumulating.

  After executing the process of step S307, the first display unit 33 starts to display the variation of the pattern in step S308.

  Returning to the description of the winning process (FIG. 9), after the process of step S205 is executed, “1” is set to the special figure variation flag of the RAM 64 in step S206. As described above, the special figure variation flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the pattern of the first display unit 33 is variably displayed in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S201, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the variable display time of the first display unit 33 has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step 207, a first variation display process is executed in step S208. Specifically, the display mode on the first display unit 33 is changed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S207, a first variation end process is executed in step S209. In the first variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 64 is specified in any one of the processes of step S304 and step S306, and the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the first display unit 33. Display control of the first display unit 33 is performed. In the subsequent step S210, the special figure variation flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S202, a positive determination is made in step S203, a positive determination is made in step S204, a process in step S206 is executed, a process in step S208 is executed, or a process in step S210 Is executed, it is determined in step S211 whether or not a winning to the through gate 24 for game times has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the signal received from the game times detection sensor 24b is switched from the LOW level signal to the HI level signal. As described above, when the game turn detection sensor 24b does not detect the game ball that has passed through the game turn through gate 24, the game turn detection sensor 24b transmits a LOW level signal to the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, thereby playing the game turn through. When a game ball that has passed through the gate 24 is detected, an HI level signal is transmitted to the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. If a negative determination is made in step S211, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S211, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the holding area RE is read in step S212, and the starting reserved ball number NA stored in the holding area RE is the upper limit (this In the embodiment, it is determined whether it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S212, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S212, 1 is added to the number of starting reserved balls NA in step S213. In the subsequent step S214, the values of the second jackpot random number counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are used as the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the above-described step S103. Is stored in the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1.

  In subsequent step S215, the holding lamp unit 35 is controlled to turn on the holding lamp unit 35 corresponding to the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE, and the main winning process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game play or a command corresponding to an effect for round game is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S403, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game number is executed. In the game times control process, a winning / no-go determination process is performed in response to the winning of the game turn through gate 24, and the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31 and the display control of the second display unit 34 are performed. . Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S404, game state transition processing is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to a round game or a high probability mode by this gaming state transition process. As described above, in round games, a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won one of the big winning openings 22a until a condition is satisfied. It is a game that continues. Further, as described above, the high probability mode is a mode in which the probability of the second big hit result is high in the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means corresponding to the winning to the through gate 24 for game times.

  In a succeeding step S405, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is set on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source and launch control device 80 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 51. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S406, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62.

  When “1” is not set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64, the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S407. That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the first random number initial value counter CINI1, the second random number initial value counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. That is, in step S408, the first random number initial value counter CINI1 and the second random number initial value counter CINI2 are updated, and in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 406 that “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64, the power is cut off, and therefore, the power interruption process after step S410 is executed. That is, in step S410, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S411. After the access to the RAM 64 is prohibited in step S412, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Next, the game times control process executed in step S403 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a game turn control process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is greater than “0”. The second round counter RC2 is a counter for specifying how many rounds stocked by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be digested. When it is possible to actually digest the number of rounds being stocked, the second round counter RC2 is in a state larger than “0”. If the number of rounds being stocked is actually digestible, there is no need to perform a success / failure determination process triggered by winning the game round through gate 24. The game times control process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether the second display unit 34 is in a variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S502, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the number of starting reserved balls NA is “0”. The case where the starting reserved ball number NA is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding area RE. Therefore, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S503, a data setting process is executed in step S504. The data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The data setting process is a process for shifting the hold information stored in the hold area RE to the lower area side. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, at step S601, 1 is subtracted from the number of starting reserved balls NA. In subsequent step S602, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  In step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In subsequent step S604, control of the hold lamp unit 35 is executed, and this data setting process is ended. Specifically, a process for changing the display on the hold lamp unit 35 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 12), after executing the process of step S504, the second variation start process is executed in step S505. The second variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. The second variation start process is a process for performing variation display on the second display unit 34. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a second variation start process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S701, the value of the second jackpot random number counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In a succeeding step S702, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. The high probability mode flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 refers to the high probability mode determination result lottery table and performs the determination processing in response to winning in the game turn through gate 24. It is a flag for. When “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and when “1” is not set to the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. It becomes.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, whether or not the value of the second jackpot random number counter C2 grasped in step S701 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the winning table for the low probability mode in step S703. Determine whether.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S702, the value of the second big hit random number counter C2 grasped in step S701 is a value corresponding to the big win winning by referring to the high probability mode success / failure table in step S704. It is determined whether or not.

  When the big hit is won (step S705: YES), the round number specifying process is executed in step S706. The round number specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The round number specifying process is a process for specifying any one of a plurality of round numbers. In the present embodiment, 4R, 8R, and 16R are set as the number of rounds, and when the second jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, the plurality of types Any number of rounds is selected from the number of rounds, and a stop result corresponding to the selected number of rounds is set. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the round number specifying process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S801, the values of the round lottery counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are grasped. The round lottery counter is used to specify any number of rounds from a plurality of types of rounds. For example, the round lottery counter is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S802, the round number lottery table in the ROM 63 is referred to, and it is determined which round number corresponds to the value of the round lottery counter grasped in step S801. In the round number lottery table, the numerical range of the round lottery counter and the number of rounds are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Here, the round number lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the round number lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the probability that 4R is selected is set to 34%, and the probability that 8R and 16R are set is set to 33%. Specifically, when the numerical range of the round lottery counter is “0 to 33”, the number of rounds is 4R, and when the numerical range of the lottery counter for rounds is “34 to 66”, the number of rounds is 8R. When the numerical range of the round lottery counter is “67 to 99”, the number of rounds is 16R. According to this configuration, the probability that each round number is selected is set to be substantially the same. Here, if the configuration is set such that the probability of selection decreases as the number of rounds increases, it cannot be expected that the number of rounds will increase. On the other hand, if the configuration is set so that the probability of selection increases as the number of rounds increases, it seems natural that the larger number of rounds is selected, so the larger number of rounds is selected. The joy in the event will fade. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the probability that each round number is selected is set to be substantially the same, it is possible to prevent the number of rounds from being expected to increase and to prevent a large number of rounds from being generated. It is possible to prevent the joy of being selected from fading.

  Returning to the description of the round number specifying process (FIG. 15), when the process of step S802 is executed, the number of rounds selected in step S802 is stored in the round number storage area 64c provided in the RAM 64 in step S803. This round number specifying process is completed. The round number storage area 64c is an area for storing information on the number of rounds specified in the round number specifying process. The round number storage area 64c is referred to not only when specifying the information on the number of rounds specified in the round number specifying process but also when specifying whether or not the second jackpot result has been obtained in the success / failure determination process. The Specifically, when information on the number of rounds is stored in the round number storage area 64c, it is determined that the second jackpot result has been obtained in the success / failure determination process.

  Returning to the description of the second variation start process (FIG. 14), after the process of step S706 is executed, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed in step S707. Specifically, when the information on the number of rounds stored in the round number storage area 64c of the RAM 64 is “4”, the number of rounds is 4R from the stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. If it is, the information of the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34 is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the round number information stored in the round number storage area 64c of the RAM 64 is “8”, the number of rounds is 8R from the stop result table for the second jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63. 2 The information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 34 is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  If the round number information stored in the round number storage area 64c of the RAM 64 is “16”, the second big hit result stop result table stored in the ROM 63 in advance indicates that the number of rounds is 16R. Information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 34 is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64.

  When the information on the number of rounds stored in the round number storage area 64c is “4”, the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34 and the number of rounds stored in the round number storage area 64c When the information on the number of rounds being “8”, the picture mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34 and the information on the number of rounds stored in the round number storage area 64c are “16”. In some cases, the pattern modes that are finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34 do not match each other.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to specify the number of rounds from the information on the pattern mode finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34. As a result, the degree of attention to the second display unit 34 can be increased.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S705, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed in step S708. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the second display unit 34 is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 64. To do.

  When the process of step S707 is executed, or when the process of step S708 is executed, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S702.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S709, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S710. In this process, first, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the result of the game times relating to the start of the current variation is the second jackpot result. Further, even if the result of the success / failure is a failure result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 63, and the fluctuation The display time information is set in a second variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 63. Then, the variation display time information is set in the second variation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of starting reserved balls NA increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the variable display time does not vary depending on the number of starting reserved balls NA, and may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of the second jackpot result, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S709, “250” is set in the second variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S711. The numerical information set in the second variable display time counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started (every 2 msec). The second variation display time counter becomes “0” 0.5 seconds after the value is set to. In the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, the variable display time of the second display unit 34 is set to 0.5 sec regardless of the result of the determination. The 0.5 sec is the shortest time among the variable display times of the second display unit 34. Incidentally, 0.5 sec is not set in the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table and the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table.

  Here, as described above, when winning in the game turn through gate 24 occurs in the high probability mode, the determination process is performed with reference to the high probability mode determination table. As described above, when the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, the probability of the second jackpot result is set to ¼. Therefore, in the high probability mode, the variation display time of the second display unit 34 is set to 0.5 sec, and the jackpot winning probability is set to ¼. According to the said structure, the time required until it becomes a 2nd big hit result becomes short. As a result, in the high probability mode and the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to shorten the time required until the round game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the high probability mode is set.

  When the process of step S710 is executed, or when the process of step S711 is executed, a change command and a success / failure result command are set in step S712. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table. In addition, as described above, the variable display time that is set when the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode is the variable display time and the reach generation variable display time table that are acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table. It is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to. In other words, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the audio light emission control device 90 that is the sub-side control device can identify whether or not reach has occurred from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is. That is, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The success / failure result command includes game result information. That is, the success / failure result command includes information on the second jackpot result or missed result as game result information. Further, the success / failure result command includes information on the number of rounds specified in step S706. Specifically, information on the number of rounds stored in the round number storage area 64c of the RAM 64 is included in the above-described success / failure result command. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the type of stop symbol is determined according to the number of rounds. When the information on the number of rounds is included in the hit / not-match result command, the sound emission control device 90 can determine a stop symbol corresponding to the number of rounds.

  The change command and the success / failure result command set in step S712 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11). Here, processing of the sound emission control device 90 corresponding to the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the change command and the success / failure result command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S901: YES), the content of the success / failure result command is set in step S902. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the result of the game times started this time corresponds to the big win.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, a symbol determination process corresponding to the big win is executed in step S903. The symbol determination process corresponding to the jackpot winning is for symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 31. Specifically, information on the number of rounds included in the success / failure result command is first grasped. When the number of rounds is 4R, it is randomly determined by lottery or the like which one of the same even symbol combinations to be stopped on one effective line L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 8R, it is randomly determined by lottery or the like which one of combinations of the same odd number symbols is to be stopped on one effective line L1 to L5. However, in this case, the “7” symbol combination is not selected. When the number of rounds is 16R, the combination of “7” symbols is stopped and displayed on one effective line L1 to L5.

  According to the said structure, the kind of stop symbol differs according to the number of rounds. This makes it possible to focus attention not only on the number of rounds but also on what the stop symbol is. Furthermore, according to the said structure, the number of rounds of the round game which can be digested this time from the said stop symbol can be specified. Since the player is highly likely to pay attention to the stop symbol, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the number of rounds. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the number of rounds of the round game. If the number of rounds in a round game becomes difficult to understand, the player will not be able to accurately specify how long the round game can be executed. In this case, it is impossible to meet the needs of a player who wants to know how long a round game will be played. In that respect, according to this configuration, the number of round games can be specified from the stop symbol, so that it is possible to meet the needs of players who want to know how much round games will be played quickly. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, a symbol determination process for removal is executed in step S904. The removal symbol determination process is intended for symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 31. In the out symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to the occurrence of out of reach display, and if it is a game time related to the occurrence of out of reach reach, Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined.

  In addition, when it is not a game turn related to occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not stopped on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the combination of outreach symbols is also stopped. Information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as information of the current stop result.

  When the process of step S903 is executed, or when the process of step S904 is executed, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed in step S905. In this case, by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the production duration time (production duration period) corresponding to the variation command and the success / failure result command received this time is selected, and Select content. In the MPU 92, according to the effect pattern determined in step S905, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed in the current game round.

  In subsequent step S906, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S903 or step S904 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S905 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for performing the current game play effect on the symbol display device 31 from the program ROM 103, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the effect for the game turn is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  Returning to the description of the second variation start process (FIG. 14), after the process of step S712 is executed, the variation display of the pattern is started on the second display unit 34 in step S713. Thereafter, the second variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 12), if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, it is determined in step S506 whether or not the variable display time of the second display unit 34 has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S506, a second variation display process is executed in step S507. Specifically, the display mode on the second display unit 34 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  When the variation display time of the second display unit 34 has elapsed (step S506: YES), the second variation end process is executed in step S508. In the second variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 64 is specified in either step S707 or step S708 of the second variation start process (FIG. 14) that is executed when starting the currently executed game round. Then, the display of the second display unit 34 is controlled so that the pattern form corresponding to the information is displayed on the second display unit 34.

  After that, after setting a change end command in step S509, the game times control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11). The sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90 or the display control apparatus 100, without transmitting a change end command.

<Time chart for explaining the flow until the start of the round game>
Next, a flow until a round game is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a time chart showing a flow until a round game is started. FIG. 18 (a) shows a timing at which a winning to the special drawing through gate 23 occurs, and FIG. 18 (b) shows a first display. FIG. 18 (c) shows the stock period of the number of rounds, FIG. 18 (d) shows the timing at which a winning to the game turn through gate 24 occurs, and FIG. e) shows the variable display period of the picture on the second display section 34, and FIG. 18 (f) shows the round game period.

  First, as shown in FIG. 18A, a winning for the special-purpose through gate 23 occurs at the timing of t1. From the same timing to the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the variation display of the picture on the first display unit 33 is performed. The period from t1 to t2 is set to 0.5 sec. Here, it is assumed that the first jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special-purpose through gate 23 at the timing t1.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, the stock period of the number of rounds is started at the timing t2 when the display of the variation of the pattern on the first display unit 33 is completed. Specifically, “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing of t2. The round period stock period is a period during which the first round counter RC1 is “1” or more. The stock period of the number of rounds continues until the first round counter RC1 becomes “0”.

  In the present embodiment, the variation display time during which the variation display of the picture on the first display unit 33 is performed is set to 0.5 sec. As described above, the jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23 is set to 100/101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration against the fact that the number of rounds is not stocked at all by generating the state in which the number of rounds is stocked as soon as possible.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18D, at the timing of t1, winning to the through gate 24 for game play occurs. From the same timing to the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 18 (e), the variation display of the pattern of the second display unit 34 is performed. Here, it is assumed that the second jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by the winning to the game turn through gate 24 at the timing of t1. Further, it is assumed that the success / failure determination process refers to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Therefore, the period from t1 to t3 is a variation display time corresponding to the numerical information of the variation type counter CS provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (f), the round game is started at the timing of t3 when the variation display of the pattern on the second display unit 34 is completed.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 occurs, a winning to the game turning through gate 24 always occurs. In addition, the time from when the special drawing through gate 23 is won to when the winning through the game turn through gate 24 is generated is shorter than the time during which the display variation of the first display portion 33 is displayed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the pattern variation display of the first display unit 33 and the pattern variation display of the second display unit 34 may be performed in an overlapping manner.

  Here, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the variable display time of the pattern on the second display unit 34 is set to 0.5 sec. As described above, the 0.5 sec is the shortest time among the variable display times of the second display unit 34. According to this configuration, when the high probability mode is set, the shortest time is set as the variable display time of the pattern of the second display unit 34, so the hold information stored in the hold area RE is digested. It is possible to increase the speed to do as much as possible. Further, as described above, in the high probability mode, the jackpot winning probability in the winning / failing determination process triggered by winning the game turn through gate 24 is set to ¼. Therefore, the variation display time of the pattern on the second display unit 34 is set to 0.5 sec, and the jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the game gate through gate 24 is set to ¼. As a result, the time required to reach the second jackpot result is shortened. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the round game to be executed in the high probability mode and the situation where the number of rounds is stocked. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the high probability mode is set.

  According to the present embodiment, in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, a predetermined release trigger occurs (the result of the success / failure determination process based on the winning to the game turn through gate 24 becomes the second jackpot result). Thus, it becomes possible to digest the stocked round number. As a result, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the round game while keeping the probability of the first jackpot result in the success / failure determination process based on winning to the special figure through gate 23 constant.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process executed in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 11) in the MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more. As described above, the first round counter RC1 is a counter for specifying the number of rounds stocked by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. When the first round counter RC1 is “1” or more, the number of rounds is stocked. That is, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is stocked.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the fluctuation of the first display unit 33 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. As described above, the first variation display time counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the variation display on the first display unit 33 is finished in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not “1” is set in the first jackpot flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the first big hit flag specifies that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is the first big hit result in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23. It is a flag for. In the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, “1” is set to the first jackpot flag of the RAM 64 when the first jackpot result is obtained.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1004. As a result, the round game is stocked for 16R.

  In subsequent step S1005, the first big hit flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S1006, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more. As described above, the second round counter RC2 is a counter for specifying how many rounds stocked in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can be digested. When the second round counter RC2 is “1” or more, the stocked number of rounds can be digested. That is, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not the stocked number of rounds can be digested.

  Although details will be described later, at the timing when “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 “ The case of “0” is a case where the number of rounds stored is indigestible in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked.

  At the timing when “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more. The case is a case where the number of rounds stocked can be digested in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is stocked, an effect generated on the display screen G differs depending on whether the second round counter RC2 is “1” or more. Yes. Therefore, by providing the processing in step S1006, it is possible to generate an effect according to the situation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1006, a first jackpot command is set in step S1007. The first jackpot command is a command for the voice light emission control device 90 to specify the timing at which the first jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23. The first jackpot command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the first jackpot command from the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 (step S907: YES), the display lamp corresponding to the first jackpot command in step S908. The light emission control of the unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S909, in order to make the display control device 100 recognize that the first jackpot result has been obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by the winning of the special figure through gate 23, the display control device 100 is made to receive the first jackpot command. Send. Here, the processing of the display control apparatus 100 corresponding to the command received from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 20, when the display control device 100 receives the first jackpot command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S1101: YES), the information for displaying the first image in step S1102 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send. Thereby, the first image is displayed on the display screen G. The first image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first image.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, “Stock Round Number!” Is displayed in the lower right of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds has been stocked. The image is displayed until there is no more round stock. Specifically, the image is displayed until the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 becomes “0”, and is not displayed at the timing when the first round counter RC1 becomes “0”. .

  However, if the player can recognize that the number of rounds is stocked, the image displayed on the display screen G is arbitrary. Specifically, for example, a character that suggests that the number of rounds is stocked may be displayed.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, a negative determination is made in step S1002, or a negative determination is made in step S1003, the various counter areas of the RAM 64 in step S1008. It is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 provided in 64b is “1” or more. In the present embodiment, even if the number of rounds is stocked, if the stocked number of rounds is not actually digestible, the big prize opening 22a described later is switched from the closed state to the open state. Do not move to. Therefore, by providing the process of step S1008, when the number of stocked rounds is not actually digestible, the special winning opening 22a described later shifts from a closed state to an open state. Can be prevented.

  When the process of step S1007 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S1008, it is determined in step S1009 whether or not the variation of the second display unit 34 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. As described above, the second variation display time counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the variation display on the second display unit 34 is finished in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, it is determined in step S1010 whether or not information on the number of rounds is stored in the round number storage area 64c provided in the RAM 64. As described above, the round number storage area 64c is an area for storing information on the number of rounds specified in the round number specifying process. When the second jackpot result is obtained in the determination process of winning or failing when winning the game turn through gate 24, information on the number of rounds specified in the round number specifying process is stored in the round number storage area 64c. If a negative determination is made in step S1010, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010, the number of rounds specified in the round number specifying process is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1011. Specifically, the round number information stored in the round number storage area 64c provided in the RAM 64 is set in the second round counter RC2. As a result, any one of “4”, “8”, and “16” is set in the second round counter RC2.

  When the process of step S1011 is executed, the round number storage area 64c provided in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in step S1012. In subsequent step S1013, continuation related processing is executed. The continuation related processing will be described with reference to FIG. The continuation related process is a process for performing a continuous lottery for specifying whether or not to continue the high probability mode. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing continuation related processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a continuation rate is stored in a continuation rate storage area 64d provided in the RAM 64. In this embodiment, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, and 90% are set as the continuation rate. However, the continuation rate is arbitrary. A continuous lottery for specifying whether to continue the high probability mode with reference to the continuation rate is performed. The continuation rate storage area 64d is an area for storing the continuation rate.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the continuation rate specifying lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped in step S1202. The continuation rate specifying lottery counter is a counter that is referred to in a lottery process for specifying any one of a plurality of types of continuation rates. For example, the continuation rate specifying lottery counter is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0.

  In subsequent step S1203, the continuation rate specifying lottery table in the ROM 63 is referred to, and it is determined which continuation rate the value of the continuation rate specifying lottery counter grasped in step S1202 corresponds to. In the continuation rate specifying lottery table, the numerical range of the continuation rate specifying lottery counter and each continuation rate are set on a one-to-one basis.

  In this embodiment, the probability that a 50% continuation rate is selected is set to 30%, the probability that a 60% continuation rate is selected is set to 25%, and a continuation rate of 70% is selected. The probability that the continuation rate of 80% is selected is set to 15%, and the probability that the continuation rate of 90% is selected is set to 10%.

  According to the said structure, it sets so that the probability of selection will become low, so that a continuation rate becomes high. In this case, since the probability that the low continuation rate is selected increases, it is assumed that the frequency with which the high probability mode continues for a long period of time decreases. Thereby, when the high probability mode occurs over a long period of time, it is possible to be thrilled that the high continuation rate may be selected.

  After executing the process of step S1203, the continuation rate specified in step S1203 is stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d of the RAM 64 in step S1204. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 or when the process of step S1204 is executed, a continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is grasped in step S1205. The continuous lottery counter is a counter that is referred to in the continuous lottery for specifying whether or not to continue the high probability mode. For example, the continuous lottery counter is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0.

  In the subsequent step S1206, referring to the continuation rate lottery table corresponding to the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d of the RAM 64, the value of the continuous lottery counter grasped in the step S1205 corresponds to the continuous winning. It is determined whether or not. In the continuation rate lottery table, the numerical range of the continuation lottery counter and the lottery result for continuation winning or continuation non-winning are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. As the continuation rate increases, the numerical range of the continuation lottery counter corresponding to the continuation win increases.

  In the case of continuous winning (step S1207: YES), if “1” is not set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 in step S1208, “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, and the RAM 64 When “1” is set in the high probability mode flag, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the continuation related process is terminated. As described above, the high probability mode flag refers to a determination process for determining whether or not the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has won the game turn through gate 24 by referring to the high probability mode determination result lottery table. It is a flag for specifying what to do.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, if the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is set to “1” in step S1209, the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”, and the high probability mode of the RAM 64 is set. When “1” is not set in the flag, the state is maintained.

  In subsequent step S1210, the continuation rate storage area 64d of the RAM 64 is cleared to “0”, and the continuation related processing is terminated. By providing the process, a negative determination is made in step S1201, and it is possible to determine the continuation rate that is referred to again in the continuous lottery.

  According to the present embodiment, whether or not to continue the lottery for transition to the high probability mode or the high probability mode when the second jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process triggered by the winning of the through gate 24 for game times. A continuous lottery is performed to identify According to this configuration, it is possible to allow a player to play a game while expecting to be a continuous winning in the continuous lottery.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the continuation rate is stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d of the RAM 64, the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d is referred to until the continuation non-winning is determined in the continuous lottery. Continue lottery. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the expectation that a high continuation rate will be selected in the lottery process for specifying the said continuation rate.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S1013, is the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1014 equal to or greater than “1”? Determine whether or not.

Although details will be described later, the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the round number specified in the round number specifying process is set. The case where the first round counter RC1 is “1” or more is a case where the number of rounds is stocked in a situation where the number of rounds stocked can be digested.

  Further, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the round number specified in the round number specifying process is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. The case where is “0” is a case where the number of rounds is not stocked in a situation where the number of rounds stocked can be digested.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the number of stocked rounds can be digested, the first round counter RC1 is generated on the display screen G depending on whether or not the first round counter RC1 is “1” or more. The production is different. Therefore, by providing the process of step S1014, it is possible to generate an effect according to the situation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1014, "1000" is set as the opening standby period in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1015. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting period is arbitrary.

  In the following step S1016, an opening command is set, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. The opening command includes numerical information on the number of rounds that can be digested. Specifically, numerical information set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is included. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11). The processing of the sound emission control device 90 when receiving the opening command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1014, a notification command is set in step S1017. The notification command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the number of rounds is not stocked in a situation where the number of rounds stocked can be consumed. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the notification command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S910: YES), the light emission of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command in step S911. While performing control, the output control of the speaker part 55 is performed. In subsequent step S912, the notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 as it is.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20, when the display control device 100 receives the notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S1103: YES), the display control device 100 transmits information for displaying the second image to the VDP 105 in step S1104. . Thereby, the second image is displayed on the display screen G. The second image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second image.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), an image of the game board 20 enlarged around the special-purpose through-gate 23 is displayed on the display screen G. Is displayed! (Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate). Accordingly, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds is not stocked and that a round game can be started if the number of rounds is stocked.

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, an arrow is displayed toward the special-purpose through gate 23 together with the characters “Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate”. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 must be generated, in an easy-to-understand manner.

  The image is displayed until the number of rounds is stocked. Specifically, the image is displayed until the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 becomes “1” or more, and is displayed when the first round counter RC1 becomes “1” or more. It will not be done.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S1017, “1” is set to the pre-opening flag of the RAM 64 in step S1018, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. The pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that the opening effect has not yet been performed in the situation where the second big hit result is obtained in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  Here, in the present embodiment, there are two patterns in which the second image is displayed on the display screen G. The first pattern is a case where a second jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the number of rounds is not stocked. Specifically, in a situation where the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”, “16” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. This is the case.

  The second pattern is a case where, when one round game is completed, the number of rounds is exhausted even though there are still digestible rounds. Specifically, when one round game is finished and the first round counter RC1 and the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are decremented by 1, the first round counter RC1 0 ”and the second round counter RC2 is“ 1 ”or more.

  In the former case, since the opening effect is not generated, it is necessary to generate the opening effect after displaying the second image. Therefore, by setting “1” to the pre-opening flag provided in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 can specify whether or not the opening effect is generated when the number of rounds is stocked. Is possible.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, it is determined in step S1019 whether or not “1” is set in the pre-opening flag of the RAM 64. As described above, the pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that the opening effect is not yet performed in the situation where the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has the second jackpot result. By providing the processing of step S1019, it is possible to generate the opening effect in a situation where the opening effect has not yet occurred.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1019, the processing in steps S1020 to S1021 is executed. The processing in steps S1020 to S1021 is the same as the processing in steps S1015 to S1016. Here, the processing of the sound emission control device 90 when the opening command is transmitted from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S913: YES), it can be digested by referring to the opening command in step S914. Know the number of rounds.

  In step S915, an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the number of rounds grasped is executed. Specifically, the process for determining the production content in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the grasped number of rounds is executed. Then, according to the set effect pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In step S916, an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of step S915 is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  When the display control device 100 receives the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, the symbol display device 31 provides the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening / closing execution mode command. A data table to be executed is read from the program ROM 103, and a drawing list is output to the VDP 105 each time a predetermined image update timing is reached according to the data table (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19), after executing the process of step S1021, the flag before opening in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” in step S1022. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, a negative determination is made in step S1019, or if the process of step S1022 is executed, a big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S1023, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. . The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is open. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1302, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, even if the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. In some cases, the process for opening the special winning opening 22a described later is not performed. Here, the state where the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0” and the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more. It is expressed as the round number supplement period. Therefore, by providing the process of step S1302, it is possible to prevent the process for opening a special prize opening 22a, which will be described later, from being performed during the round number replenishment period.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. When a negative determination is made in step S1303, the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, a big prize opening process is executed in step S1304. In the big winning opening opening process, first, “10” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. The winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for specifying the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a which is one end condition of the round game in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  Next, “15000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64 b of the RAM 64. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started (every 2 msec), a value is set in the timer counter T. 30 seconds later, the timer counter T becomes “0”. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for the opening time until the variable winning device 22 changes from the open state to the closed state, and 30 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. However, when the launch operation is continuously performed during the opening time, the opening time is arbitrary as long as the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a, which is one end condition of the round game, is reached. .

  Next, an opening execution process is executed to end the special winning opening release process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 22c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 22a is opened.

  After executing the process of step S1304, an opening command is set in step S1305, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the above opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S917: YES), the display lamp unit corresponding to the time when the special winning opening 22a is opened in step S918. The light emission control 54 is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S919, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so that the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening of the special winning opening 22a is started. The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referenced in the data table based on the received release command. Thereby, on the display screen G, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 23), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0” in step S1306. judge.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined in step S1307 whether or not winning of the special winning opening 22a is detected. If a negative determination is made in step S1307, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by 1 in step S1308. In subsequent step S1309, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1309, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, a closing execution process is executed in step S1310. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c is finished so that the special winning opening 22a is closed. In subsequent step S1311, a close command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the closing command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S920: YES), the display lamp unit corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 22a in step S921. The display control 54 is executed, and the light emission control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In subsequent step S922, a close command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received close command. As a result, an effect corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 23), after executing the process of step S1311, the first round counter RC1 and the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 are set in step S1312. Subtract 1 By executing this processing, it is possible to specify the number of rounds stocked and the number of remaining rounds that can be digested after executing one round game in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In subsequent step S1313, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. The state in which the second round counter RC2 is “0” is a state in which the number of rounds stocked cannot be digested, and the state in which the second round counter RC2 is greater than “0” is the number of rounds stocked. Is digestible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1313, it is determined in step S1314 whether or not the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”. The state where the first round counter RC1 is “0” is a state where the number of rounds is not stocked, and the state where the first round counter RC1 is greater than “0” means that the number of rounds is stocked. It is in a state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1314 (when the first round counter RC1 and the second round counter RC2 are greater than “0”), the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is set in step S1315. “500” is set, and the final prize opening / closing process is completed. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for an opening waiting time until the variable winning device 22 is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently to the open state again. In the pachinko machine 10, the numerical information is 1 sec. Is set. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1314, a notification command is set in step S1316, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. As described above, the notification command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the number of rounds is not stocked in a situation where the number of stocked rounds can be digested. It is. As described above, the notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11), and then transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100. Thereby, the second image shown in FIG. 22B is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, on the display screen G, an image of the game board 20 enlarged around the special-purpose through gate 23 is displayed, and “stock the number of rounds and start the round game!” “Please win a prize for the special-purpose through gate”). Accordingly, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds is not stocked and that a round game can be started if the number of rounds is stocked.

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, an arrow is displayed toward the special-purpose through gate 23 together with the characters “Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate”. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 must be generated, in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable display time of the first display unit 33 triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23 is set to 0.5 sec, and the special figure through gate 23 is won. The jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process triggered by the event is set to 100/101. Therefore, in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, the period required to reach the first jackpot result is shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which the number of rounds is not stocked for a long period of time during the round number replenishment period and accumulation of irritation for the situation.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 23), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1313 (when the second round counter RC2 is “0”), provision is made in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 in step S1317. The timer counter T is set to “2000” as the ending waiting time (waiting period). That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In subsequent step S1318, an ending command is set, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command includes information as to whether or not the continuous winning in the continuous lottery with reference to the continuation rate lottery table is made. Specifically, information on whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64 is included. The ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the sound emission control device 90 receives an ending command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 (step S923: YES), the sound emission control device 90 executes an ending correspondence process in step S924. In the ending handling process, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  Next, referring to the ending command received this time, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the lottery result is executed.

  Specifically, in the continuation process referring to the continuation rate lottery table, if the continuation non-winning is selected, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is provided this time. It will be decided as the ending production.

  On the other hand, in the case of continuous winning in the continuous lottery, an effect including the content for causing the player to recognize that the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is determined as the ending effect of this time. In subsequent step S925, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of the ending handling process is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  When the display control device 100 receives the ending command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 transmits information for displaying an ending image corresponding to the lottery result of the continuous lottery referring to the lottery table for continuation rate to the VDP 105. As a result, an ending image corresponding to the lottery result of the continuation process referring to the continuation rate lottery table is displayed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, when “1” is not set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, “See you!” Is displayed on the display screen G, and “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64. If it is, “Once again!” Is displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, the lottery result of the continuous lottery cannot be specified until the ending image is displayed on the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to be thrilled for a long time whether or not the lottery result of the continuous lottery is a continuous winning.

<Time chart for explaining the flow during the round game>
Next, the flow during the round game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a time chart showing the flow during the round game. FIG. 24 (a) shows the end timing of the change of the second display unit 34 corresponding to the second jackpot result, and FIG. 24 (b) shows the round number supplement period. FIG. 24 (c) shows the variation end timing of the first display unit 33 corresponding to the first jackpot result, FIG. 24 (d) shows the number of rounds stocked, and FIG. 24 (e) is digested. Shows the number of rounds played.

  First, as shown in FIG. 24A, at the timing of t1, the variation of the second display unit 34 corresponding to the second jackpot result is completed. Here, it is assumed that the upper limit number of round games that can be digested when the second jackpot result is reached at the timing of t1 is set to eight. In this case, “8” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  From the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 24B, a round number supplement period occurs. The round number supplement period is a period in which the number of rounds is not stocked in the situation where the second round counter RC2 is “1” or more, and continues until the round number is stocked. Further, in the round number replenishment period, even if a winning to the game turn through gate 24 occurs, the variable display on the second display unit 34 is not performed.

  In addition, in a situation where the number of rounds stocked can be digested at the timing of t1, a notification command for specifying in the voice light emission control device 90 that the number of rounds is not stocked is issued by the voice light emission control device. 90. The sound emission control device 90 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command and also performs output control of the speaker unit 55.

  Thereafter, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the notification command to the display control device 100. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), an image of the game board 20 enlarged around the special-purpose through-gate 23 is displayed on the display screen G. To start the round game! (Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate). Accordingly, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds is not stocked and that a round game can be started if the number of rounds is stocked.

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, an arrow is displayed toward the special-purpose through gate 23 together with the characters “Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate”. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 must be generated, in an easy-to-understand manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c) at the timing of t2, when the change of the first display unit 33 corresponding to the first jackpot result is completed, the number of rounds is stocked as shown in FIG. 24 (d) at the same timing. Is done. Specifically, “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. With this, the number of rounds for 16R is stocked.

  From the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the number of rounds is digested as shown in FIG. Specifically, a round game with 8R as the upper limit number of times is performed. Each time one round game is executed, the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by 1, and the round game is played until the second round counter RC2 becomes “0”.

  At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 24D, the stocked round number is subtracted by 8R. As each round game is performed, the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is decremented by 1. Specifically, at the timing of t3, the first round counter RC1 becomes “8”.

  As shown in FIG. 24A at the timing of t4, the variation of the second display unit 34 corresponding to the second jackpot result is completed. Here, it is assumed that the upper limit number of round games that can be consumed when the second jackpot result is reached at the timing of t4 is set to 16. In this case, “16” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  From the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the number of rounds is digested as shown in FIG. Specifically, in the round game with 16R as the upper limit, 8R round games are performed. At the timing of t5, the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 becomes “8”.

  At the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 24D, the stocked round number is subtracted by 8R. Specifically, at the timing of t5, the first round counter RC1 becomes “0”. The state in which the first round counter RC1 is “0” is a state in which the number of rounds is not stocked.

  From the timing t5 to the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 24B, a round number supplement period occurs. As described above, the round number supplement period continues until the number of rounds is stocked.

  In addition, in the situation where the number of rounds stocked can be digested at the timing of t5, a notification command for specifying in the voice light emission control device 90 that the number of rounds is not stocked is issued by the voice light emission control device. 90. The sound emission control device 90 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command and also performs output control of the speaker unit 55.

  Thereafter, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the notification command to the display control device 100. As a result, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), an image of the game board 20 enlarged around the special-purpose through-gate 23 is displayed on the display screen G. To start the round game! (Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate). Accordingly, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds is not stocked and that a round game can be started if the number of rounds is stocked.

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, an arrow is displayed toward the special-purpose through gate 23 together with the characters “Generate a prize for the special-purpose through gate”. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 must be generated, in an easy-to-understand manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c) at the timing of t6, when the first jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, it is shown in FIG. 24 (d) at the same timing. As a result, the number of rounds is stocked. Specifically, “16” is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  From the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, as shown in FIG.24 (e), the round game for the part which was not digested is performed. In this case, the round game is performed until the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 becomes “0”. The second round counter RC2 is decremented by 1 each time each round game is played. When the second round counter RC2 becomes “0”, the round game is ended.

  According to the present embodiment, when a predetermined release trigger occurs in a situation where the number of rounds is not stocked, or when there is no stock of round numbers during the opening / closing execution mode based on the occurrence of the predetermined release trigger, The first jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process based on the winning to the special figure through gate 23, and the round game is resumed after waiting for the number of rounds to be stocked. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the situation where a round game is started.

  At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 24D, the stocked round number is subtracted by 8R. Specifically, at the timing of t7, the first round counter RC1 becomes “8”.

  As shown in FIG. 24A at the timing of t8, the variation of the second display unit 34 corresponding to the second jackpot result is completed. Here, it is assumed that the upper limit number of round games that can be consumed when the second jackpot result is reached at the timing of t8 is set to eight. In this case, “8” is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  As shown in FIG. 24E, a round game is performed from the timing t8 to the timing t9. As described above, the round game is performed until the second round counter RC2 becomes “0”. Therefore, a round game for 8R is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 24D, the number of rounds is digested at the timing of t9. Specifically, a round game with 8R as the upper limit number of times is performed. At the timing of t9, the first round counter RC1 and the second round counter RC2 become “0”.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, the number of rounds is stocked when the first jackpot result is obtained. In the situation where the number of rounds was stocked, it was selected when the second jackpot result was obtained by the second jackpot result in the winning / failing determination process triggered by winning the through gate 24 for game times It becomes possible to digest the round game for the number of rounds. As a result, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the round game while keeping the probability of the first jackpot result in the success / failure determination process based on winning to the special figure through gate 23 constant.

  When a predetermined release trigger occurs in a situation where the number of rounds is not stocked, or when there is no round number stock in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode based on the occurrence of the predetermined release trigger, go to the special-purpose through gate 23 In the success / failure determination process based on the winning of No. 1, the first jackpot result is obtained, and the round game is resumed after waiting for the number of rounds to be stocked. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the situation where a round game is started.

  Depending on the number of rounds, the types of stop symbols are different. This makes it possible to focus attention not only on the number of rounds but also on what the stop symbol is. Furthermore, according to the said structure, the number of rounds of the round game which can be digested this time from the said stop symbol can be specified now. Since the player is highly likely to pay attention to the stop symbol, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify the current round number. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to understand the number of rounds of the current round game. If the number of rounds in a round game becomes difficult to understand, the player will not be able to accurately specify how long the round game can be executed. In this case, it is impossible to meet the needs of a player who wants to know how long a round game will be played. In this regard, according to this configuration, the number of rounds of the current round game can be specified from the stop symbol, so that it is possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to know how long the round game will be played quickly. It becomes possible.

  If the second jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process triggered by winning the through gate 24 for game times, the lottery for specifying whether to shift to the high probability mode or continue the high probability mode Is done. According to this configuration, it is possible to allow a player to play a game while expecting to be a continuous winning in the continuous lottery.

  When the continuation rate is stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d of the RAM 64, the continuation lottery is performed with reference to the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area 64d until the continuation non-winning in the continuation lottery. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the expectation that a high continuation rate will be selected in the lottery process for specifying the said continuation rate.

  The variation display time of the first display unit 33 triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23 is set to 0.5 sec, and the jackpot in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23 The winning probability is set to 100/101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration against the fact that the number of rounds is not stocked at all by generating the state in which the number of rounds is stocked as soon as possible.

  When “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 64, the variable display time of the second display unit 34 is set to 0.5 sec, and the jackpot winning probability is set to ¼. According to the said structure, the time required until it becomes a 2nd big hit result becomes short. As a result, in the high probability mode and the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to shorten the time required until the round game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the high probability mode is set.

  The time from when the winning to the special figure through gate 23 occurs until the winning to the game turning through gate 24 occurs is shorter than the time when the variation display of the picture on the first display unit 33 is performed. Therefore, the pattern change display of the first display unit 33 and the pattern change display of the second display unit 34 can be performed in an overlapping manner.

  In a situation where the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”, when the first jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special-purpose through gate 23, On the display screen G, a first image for notifying that the number of rounds is stocked in the above situation is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the number of rounds has been stocked.

  In the situation where the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0”, in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the through gate 24 for game times, the second big hit result is obtained Alternatively, when there is no more round stock during the round game, a second image is displayed on the display screen G to notify that there is no round stock. According to this configuration, the player is informed that the number of rounds is not in stock in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the launch operation for the purpose of winning the special-purpose through gate 23 in a situation where there is no round number stock. Can be performed. As described above, the variable display time of the first display unit 33 triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23 is set to 0.5 sec, and the winning of the special figure through gate 23 is triggered. The jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process is set to 100/101. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a period during which a round game cannot be digested from occurring for a long period of time despite the state in which the round game can be digested.

  In the ending period, an ending image corresponding to the lottery result of the continuous lottery is displayed. The player cannot specify the lottery result of the continuous lottery until the ending image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to be thrilled for a long time whether or not the lottery result of the continuous lottery is a continuous winning.

<Another example of the first embodiment>
(1) There is no limitation to the configuration in which the special-purpose through gate 23 is provided above the game-playing through gate 24. The gaming-through through gate 24 is located above the special-drawing through gate 23. It is good also as a structure provided.

  The special-purpose through-gate 23 and the game-playing through-gate 24 are not limited to the upper and lower structures. 24 may not be provided vertically. Specifically, for example, the special-purpose through gate 23 may be provided on the left side of the game board 20, and the game turning through gate 24 may be provided on the right side of the game board 20.

  (2) It is possible to stock a new number of rounds even when the number of rounds is stocked, and in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, it is a big hit in the pass / fail judgment process when winning the special-purpose through gate 23 The winning probability may be reduced. Here, in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, if the jackpot winning probability in the success / failure determination process when winning the special figure through gate 23 is not reduced, the number of rounds stocked will be excessive. In this case, there is a possibility that the process of stocking the number of rounds by winning a game ball in the special-purpose through gate 23 during the round game may not occur. In this regard, according to this configuration, in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a big hit in the determination process of winning or failing when winning the special figure through gate 23 decreases, so the number of rounds stocked becomes too large. Less likely. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to newly stock the number of rounds, and the process of stocking the number of rounds by winning the game ball to the special-purpose through gate 23 during the round game does not occur. Can be prevented.

  Even if the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to stock a new number of rounds. In the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a big hit in the decision processing for winning or failing when winning the special-purpose through gate 23 is high. In the decreasing configuration, when the number of rounds that can be digested becomes “0” in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning / failing determination process when winning the game-use through gate 24 is increased. It is good. Here, when the number of rounds that can be digested becomes “0” in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a jackpot in the determination process of winning or failing when winning the through gate 24 for game times is not increased. Then, it takes too much time to digest all the rounds stocked. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the number of rounds that can be digested becomes “0” in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a jackpot in the success / failure determination process when winning the game-use through gate 24 Becomes higher. As a result, it is possible to prevent that it takes too much time to digest all the rounds that have been stocked.

  (3) When the number of rounds that can be digested becomes “0” in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a jackpot in the determination process of winning or failing when winning the through gate 24 for game times may be increased. Good. Here, if the number of rounds is stocked, the player is likely to want to digest the number of rounds stocked as soon as possible. According to this configuration, when the number of rounds is stocked, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning / failing determination process when winning the game turn through gate 24 is high. It becomes possible to shorten the time taken to digest the number. As a result, in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to prevent the player's irritation from accumulating by preventing the time taken for the stocked rounds to be consumed. It becomes possible to stop.

  (4) It is good also as a structure where the display of change of the pattern of the 1st display part 33 and the display of change of the pattern of the 2nd display part 34 do not overlap. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the lottery process for determining whether or not to stock the number of rounds and the result of the lottery process for determining whether or not the stocked number of rounds can be digested. Become.

  (5) The upper working port and the lower working port may be provided. In this case, the upper operation port and the lower operation port may be configured as a unit as an operation port device and installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port and the lower working port may be open upward, and the two working ports may be arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper working port is upward. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the electrically-driven accessory as a guide piece (support piece) which consists of a left-right paired movable piece in the said lower working port. The electric accessory is connected to an electric accessory driving unit mounted on the back side of the game board, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state ( (Support state and guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory, the game ball cannot win a prize in the lower working port, and when the electric accessory is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the lower working port. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is an electric combination between a state in which a winning of a game ball is likely to occur in the lower operating port and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which a winning is not impossible but the above winning is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which a thing is switched. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have an electric accessory and switches between the state where a winning is likely to occur and the state where a winning is less likely to occur than that due to the displacement of the lower working port itself. In a configuration with an upper working port and a lower working port, when a prize is generated for the upper working port or the lower working port, it is possible to digest the change display of the symbols on the display screen G and the number of rounds stocked. It is good also as a structure in which the success / failure determination process for determining whether it becomes is performed. More specifically, the first jackpot result in which the number of rounds is stocked in the success / failure determination process triggered by the winning of the special figure through gate 23 is triggered by the winning of the upper operating port or the lower operating port. It becomes possible to digest a round game by becoming the 2nd big hit result which can digest the number of rounds stocked in the decision processing.

  (6) A lottery for specifying a continuation rate may be performed every time a big win is won in the winning / no-going determination process triggered by the winning of the through gate 24 for game times. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting a high continuation rate to be selected every time a second jackpot result is obtained.

  It is good also as a structure by which the lottery table from which a continuation rate differs for every round number selected in the round number specific process is set. In this case, the lottery table may be configured such that the smaller the number of rounds selected in the round number specifying process, the larger the allocation to the high continuation rate. Here, if the number of rounds that can be digested is small and the number of times that the high probability mode continues is small, there is a high possibility that irritation will be accumulated. In this regard, according to the present configuration, a lottery table having a larger allocation to the high continuation rate is selected as the number of rounds selected in the round number specifying process is smaller. Accordingly, by reducing the frequency of occurrence of a situation where the number of rounds that can be digested is small and the number of times that the high probability mode is continued is reduced, it is possible to prevent accumulation of annoyance to the occurrence of the situation. It becomes possible.

  (7) The probability of each round number selected in the round number specifying process is not limited to the configuration in which the round numbers are set to be substantially the same. For example, the larger the round number, the higher the probability selected in the round number specifying process. It is good also as a structure set so that may become low. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration when a large number of rounds is selected in the round number specifying process.

  It is good also as a structure from which the probability of each round number selected in the said round number specific process differs according to a condition. Specifically, for example, the round number specifying process performed in the situation of the high probability mode may be configured such that a larger round number is more easily selected than the round number specifying process performed in the situation of the low probability mode. . According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot is won in the situation of the high probability mode.

  (8) It is good also as a structure from which the distribution of the continuation rate selected according to a stop symbol differs. Specifically, for example, a higher continuation rate may be selected more easily when an odd symbol is an even symbol. According to the said structure, it can be specified whether a high continuation rate is easy to be selected by specifying the kind of stop symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree with respect to the kind of stop symbol.

  (9) A special success table is set in which the jackpot winning probability is lower than the winning table for the high probability mode, and the jackpot winning probability is higher than the winning table for the low probability mode. In the case where there is not, the configuration may be such that the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the special success / failure table. Here, in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode increases the time required to win the big hit, so the feeling of trying to digest the number of rounds stocked decreases. End up. In this regard, according to the present configuration, if the continuation winning is not determined in the continuation rate specifying process, the winning / nothing determination process is performed with reference to the special winning / failing table having a higher jackpot winning probability than the winning table for the low probability mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the feeling of trying to digest the number of rounds stocked when falling from the high probability mode from being lowered.

  (10) The continuation rate selected in the continuation rate specifying process may be displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, since the selected continuation rate is displayed on the display screen G, the current continuation rate can be clearly specified by the player. Thereby, when a high continuation rate is displayed on the display screen G, it is possible to expect the high probability mode to continue and to give the player a sense of security that the high continuation rate has been selected. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the low continuation rate is displayed on the display screen G, it can be thrilled whether or not the high probability mode is continued.

  The display screen G is not limited to the configuration in which the continuation rate selected in the continuation rate specifying process is displayed. For example, a suggestion image that suggests the continuation rate is displayed on the display screen G. It is good also as a structure. In this case, a plurality of types of suggestion images may be set, and any suggestion image may be selected regardless of which continuation rate is selected. According to the said structure, since the suggestion image which suggests a high continuation rate can be displayed on the display screen G even if the selected continuation rate is a low continuation rate, the selected continuation rate is a low continuation rate. If so, it is possible to make the player think that a high continuation rate may have been selected.

  (11) The variable display time set when the number of rounds is stocked and the lottery mode is in the low probability mode, the variable display time is set when the number of rounds is not stocked and the lottery mode is in the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure which becomes shorter or tends to become shorter than the fluctuation display time set to (1). Here, in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, when the winning / not-to-lot lottery mode is the low probability mode, if the variation display time is not shortened, the time taken to reach the second jackpot result will be too long. there is a possibility. In this case, frustration accumulates for a long period of time when it is not possible to digest the round game for the stock. In this regard, according to this configuration, the variable display time that is set when the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode in the situation where the number of rounds is stocked, It is likely to be shorter or shorter than the variable display time set in the low probability mode. According to this configuration, in a situation where the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to prevent the time taken for the stocked rounds from being consumed too long. As a result, it is possible to prevent annoyance from accumulating against the occurrence of a state in which the round game for stock cannot be digested for a long time.

  (12) When the number of rounds to be released this time is smaller than the number of rounds being stocked, the round number obtained by subtracting the number of rounds to be released this time from the stocked round number may be deleted. Specifically, if the winning determination process is triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, a round of 16R is stocked. In the situation where the number of rounds of 16R is stocked, if 4R or 8R is selected as the number of rounds that can be digested, 12R or 8R is stocked after digesting 4R or 8R. In this configuration, the stocked 12R or 8R is deleted. Here, if the stocked number of rounds is not erased, it is difficult to stop the game halfway. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the number of stocked rounds is deleted, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty stopping the game halfway.

  (13) The upper limit of the number of rounds that can be stocked is not limited to 16R. For example, a configuration that can stock a round number larger than 16R may be adopted. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency which the situation where the round number which can be digested becomes larger than the stocked round number occurs.

  It is good also as a structure which determines the upper limit of the round number which can be stocked by lottery. Specifically, if a win-win determination process is triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, one of the upper limits of the number of rounds that can be stocked is specified. A lottery will be held. According to the said structure, while expecting that it will become a 1st jackpot result in the success / failure determination process triggered by winning the special figure through gate 23, it is also expected that the upper limit of the number of rounds that can be stocked is increased. It becomes possible.

  (14) Instead of whether or not the number of rounds is stocked, the stocked number of rounds may be displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the number of rounds stocked is 16R, “16R stock” is displayed on the display screen G, and when the number of rounds stocked is 8R, “8R In the case where “stock of minutes” is displayed and the number of stocked rounds is 4R, “4R stock” may be displayed on the display screen G. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make a player specify clearly the number of rounds currently stocked.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is stocked, the image corresponding to the number of rounds being stocked is not displayed, but the display lamp unit 54 emits light corresponding to the number of rounds being stocked. It is good also as a structure controlled. According to the said structure, since the image which alert | reports having stocked the number of rounds is not displayed on the display screen G, it becomes possible to raise attention to the effect displayed on the display screen G. Further, since the display lamp unit 54 is controlled to emit light, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display lamp unit 54 that is less noticed during the game.

  The player may not be notified that the number of rounds is in stock. Specifically, even if the first jackpot result is obtained, a configuration may be adopted in which an image that informs the player that the number of rounds is stocked is not displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, since the player is not notified that the number of rounds is stocked, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while pounding whether or not the number of rounds is stocked.

  It is good also as a structure which can identify only the person concerned in a game hall that the number of rounds is in the stocked state. Specifically, when the number of rounds is stocked, the information may be transmitted to the hall computer. Specifically, the hall computer is electrically connected to each pachinko machine through an electrical wiring group, and when the number of rounds is stocked, information on the number of rounds stocked is transmitted to the hall computer. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make it identify only the person concerned of a game hall that the number of rounds has been stocked.

  (15) When the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “0” and the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 is “1” or more, for special figures It may be configured to be a big win in the determination process of winning / notifying triggered by winning through the through gate 23. Here, when the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the second round counter RC2 is “1” or more when one round game is finished, the number of rounds is stocked and the first round counter RC1 Until the game becomes “1” or more, the round game cannot be digested. In this case, the player is likely to feel frustrated with the interruption of the round game. In this situation, the player's irritation is accumulated when the result of the success / failure determination process triggered by the winning of the special figure through gate 23 becomes a result of losing. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the second round counter RC2 is “1” or more, the determination of success / failure triggered by winning the special-purpose through gate 23 is made. In the processing, it will be a big win. This makes it possible to prevent the frustration from becoming greater in a situation where the frustration is felt that the round game has been interrupted.

  (16) The winning history to the special figure through gate 23 may be stored on hold. Specifically, a holding area for storing holding information corresponding to winning in the special-purpose through gate 23 may be provided in the holding ball storage area 64a of the RAM 64. Until the upper limit number (for example, 4) that can be stored in the reserved area is reached, the reserved information may be stored in the reserved area every time a winning to the special-purpose through gate 23 occurs. According to this configuration, the greater the number of holding information corresponding to the special figure through gate 23, the greater the number of times the winning / failing determination process is performed when winning the special figure through gate 23. There is a high possibility that the hold information corresponding to the one big hit result is stored. In order to increase the number of hold information corresponding to the special-purpose through gate 23, it is necessary to continue the launch operation before the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the time until the number of rounds is stocked different according to the game content before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs.

  (17) It is good also as a structure which stops and displays the combination of a common symbol regardless of the number of rounds, and performs a promotion effect etc. after that. Specifically, if a second jackpot result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process based on winning to the through gate 24 for game times, any one of the same symbol combinations on one active line L1 to L5 is stopped. It is good also as a structure which determines at random by lottery etc. Thereafter, for example, a promotion effect may be generated during a round game. Specifically, when the digestible round numbers are 8R and 16R, an image for notifying that the round number is 8R or 16R may be displayed on the display screen G after 4R digestion. According to this configuration, it is possible to cause a player to play a round game while expecting the promotion effect to occur during a round game.

  In a configuration in which a combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed for any number of rounds, and then a promotion effect or the like is executed, the probability that the promotion effect is executed according to the stop symbol may be increased. . Specifically, in the case of 4R in which no promotion effect is generated, the probability of selection being higher as the number of stop symbols is smaller may be adopted. Moreover, in the case of 8R, it is good also as a structure where the probability of selection becomes high, so that the number of stop symbols becomes large. Further, in the case of 16R, the probability that a larger number of stop symbols is selected than in the case of 8R may be high. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the stop symbol and to expect a large number of stop symbols to be selected.

  (18) The probability that the result of the success / failure determination process based on the winning to the special figure through gate 23 will be the first jackpot result is set to 1/400, and the winning / failing based on the winning to the through gate 24 for game times is set. The probability that the result of the determination process is the second jackpot result may be set to 100/101. In this case, since the probability of the first jackpot result is low and the probability of the second jackpot result is high, the number of rounds is difficult to be stocked, and the stocked number of rounds is likely to be actually digestible. . When the second jackpot result is obtained and numerical information is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64, it becomes a waiting period until the round game is started. During the waiting period, even if a winning to the game turn through gate 24 occurs, the symbol display on the display screen G does not occur. It may be configured that a special effect is generated on the display screen G when a winning to the game play through gate 24 occurs during the waiting period. Specifically, for example, a character may be displayed on the display screen G, and the character may count the number of winnings to the game turn through gate 24. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a game different from the normal game.

  The probability that the result of the success / failure determination process based on the winning to the special figure through gate 23 becomes the first jackpot result may be changed according to the situation. Specifically, in the case of the low probability mode, the probability of being the first jackpot result is set to 1/101, and in the case of the high probability mode, the probability of being the first jackpot result is 101 minutes. The configuration may be set to 100. According to the said structure, the state from which the number of rounds becomes easy to stock according to a condition differs. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention also whether it is in the state where the number of rounds is easy to stock. In the configuration, a plurality of rounds to be stocked are set, and the number of rounds to be stocked may be different between a state in which the number of rounds is easily stocked and a state in which the number of rounds is difficult to stock. Specifically, if the number of rounds is easy to stock and results in the first big hit, the number of rounds to be stocked is small, and if the number of rounds is difficult to stock, the result is the first big hit results. The number of rounds played may be large.

  In this configuration, the number of rounds to be stocked is determined by lottery, and the distribution in the lottery is different between a state where the number of rounds is easy to stock and a state where the number of rounds is difficult to stock It is good. Specifically, a configuration in which a larger number of rounds is likely to be stocked in the lottery may be easier in a state where the number of rounds is more likely to be stocked than in a state where the number of rounds is difficult to stock. According to the above-described two configurations, it is possible to ensure the benefit for the first jackpot result when the number of rounds is difficult to stock.

  (19) When the number of rounds is 16R, it is not limited to the configuration in which “7” symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the number of rounds is 16R and the high probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode ends, “7” It is good also as a structure by which a symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, the player is likely to think that “7” symbol is most preferential, and when “7” symbol is stopped, the number of rounds is 16R, and the high probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode ends. There is a high possibility of expecting. Here, in the present embodiment, when the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that it will be 16R, but there is a possibility that the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If the low probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode ends despite the “7” symbol being stopped, the player is likely to feel frustrated. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, the number of rounds is 16R, and the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being lowered when the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed.

<Second Embodiment>
Conditions for enabling a round game are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Composition of game board 20>
First, the configuration of the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a front view of the game board 20 in the second embodiment.

  The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 120, a lower operating port 121, a through gate 125, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 133, an accessory display unit 134, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 120, and the lower operating port 121, this is detected by various winning detection sensors (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20. Then, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 for dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 120, the lower operating port 121, or the through gate 125 are inserted. A game ball entry is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 120 and the lower operating port 121 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 120 and the lower working port 121 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 120 and 121 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 120 is located on the upper side. The lower working port 121 is provided with an electric accessory 121a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 121a is connected to an electric accessory driving unit 121b mounted on the back side of the game board 20, and is driven by the electric accessory driving unit 121b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 121a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operation port 121, and the electric operation item 121a is in an open state, so that the lower operation port 121 can be won.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 121 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 121a is switched. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have the electrically-driven accessory 121a, and is switched by the displacement of the lower operation port 121 itself between the state where winning is likely to occur and the state where winning is more difficult than that.

  In the main display unit 133, a variation display of a picture is performed using a winning at the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, a prize is awarded to the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 120 and the winning to the lower working port 121 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 120 or the lower working port 121. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 133 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 120 or the lower working port 121 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 133. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later.

  The main display unit 133 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited thereto, and is not limited thereto. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 133, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 134, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning to the through gate 125 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 125 is displayed. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 125 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is released, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 134 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination item 121a provided in the lower working port 121 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  A first holding lamp portion 135 corresponding to the main display portion 133 and the symbol display device 31 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121 are reserved, and the number of the game balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 135 is turned on.

  In the upper right part of the center frame 32, a second holding lamp unit 136 corresponding to the accessory display unit 134 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 125 is reserved up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second reservation lamp portion 136.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  An MPU 142 is mounted on a main control board 141 provided in the main controller 140. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 142 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 143 and the RAM 144 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 142, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 140.

  The MPU 142 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 70 provided in the main control device 140 are connected to the input side of the MPU 142. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power source having a function of supplying operating power and the launch control device 80, and power is supplied to the MPU 142 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 120a, 121c are connected to the input side of the MPU 142. In the MPU 142, a winning determination is made for each winning part. The various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 120a, and 121c output electric signals to the main controller 140. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. Further, the MPU 142 executes various lotteries based on winnings in the upper working port 120 and the lower working port 121.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 142. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 142, a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric combination driving unit 121b that opens and closes the electric combination 121a of the lower working port 121, and a main display unit. 133, an accessory display section 134 and various holding lamp sections 135 and 136 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140>
An electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 142 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 133, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 134, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, a jackpot random number counter C4 used for lottery generation for jackpot generation, a reach random number counter C5 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 31 moves out and fluctuates, and a jackpot random number A random number initial value counter CINI3 used for setting an initial value of the counter C4 and a variation type counter CS2 for determining a variation display time in the main display unit 133 and the symbol display device 31 are used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C6 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 121a of the lower working port 121 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C4, C5, C6, CINI3 and CS2 are provided in various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144.

  Each counter C4, C5, C6, CINI3, CS2 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C4 and the reach random number counter C5 is stored in a reserved ball storage area 144a provided as an acquisition information storage means in the RAM 144 when a winning to the upper working port 120 or the lower working port 121 occurs. Is done.

  The holding ball storage area 144a includes a holding area RA and an execution area AP. The holding area RA includes a first holding area RA1, a second holding area RA2, a third holding area RA3, and a fourth holding area RA4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 120 or the lower operating port 121. The combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C4 and the reach random number counter C5 is stored as holding information in any of the holding areas RA1 to RA4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RA1 to the fourth reservation area RA4, when the winning to the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RA1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RA2 → third reserved area RA3 → fourth reserved area RA4. By providing the four holding areas RA1 to RA4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 120 or the lower operating port 121 are stored and stored. In addition, the holding area RA includes a holding number storage area NE, and the number of holdings of the winning history to the upper operating port 120 or the lower operating port 121 is specified in the holding number storage area NE. Is performed.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AP is an area for moving each piece of numerical information stored in the first holding area RA1 of the holding area RA when starting the variable display on the main display unit 133. At the start of one game round Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AP.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C6 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C6 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C6 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role reservation area 144c of the RAM 144 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 125. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 121a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C6.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 121a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 121a of the lower working port 121 is in an open state per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  Although the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability (for example, both 4/5) of winning the electric utility open state in the electric appliance open lottery using the electric appliance open counter C6. In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 121a is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 121a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The variable display time (one time in the accessory display unit 134) is set short.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 121 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the upper working port 120 is higher than the lower working port 121, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 121 is connected to the lower working port 121. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 121, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 134 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 125) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C4 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C4 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to zero. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI3 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C4. The random number initial value counter CINI3 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 144a of the RAM 144 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 143a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 143. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the success / failure tables include a low / probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 28 (a) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high) in FIG. Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot result is six. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to, the probability of the jackpot result is set to 1/100.

  On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to, the probability of the jackpot result is set to 1/10.

  In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C4 that becomes the jackpot result in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C4 that becomes the jackpot result in the situation in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers resulting in the jackpot result are arbitrary, and the jackpot resulting in the jackpot result in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the random number counter C4 may be configured so that only a part is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C4 that is a jackpot result in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the random number value that will be the jackpot result will be the jackpot result, and after the open / close execution mode ends, it will be the trigger for the success / fail lottery mode and support mode, while other than the random number value that will be the jackpot result The lottery result becomes a losing result, and the losing result does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode, and the support mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which a predetermined number of round games are performed. The round game is a big prize opening until one of the conditions for a predetermined upper limit duration to elapse and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls to win the big prize opening 22a is satisfied. The game in which the state in which 22a is released continues. The upper limit duration is set to 3 sec, and the upper limit number is set to 2. In each round game, the special winning opening 22a is opened only once, but the opening may be performed a plurality of times.

  Next, the reach random number counter C5 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C5 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C5 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 144a of the RAM 144 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 120 or the lower operation port 121.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, and the remaining combinations are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C5 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. In the game times corresponding to the detachment result, the reach random number counter C5 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 143 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  Next, the variation type counter CS2 will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS <b> 2 is used to determine the variation display time on the main display unit 133 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31 in the MPU 142. The variation type counter CS2 is updated by a timer interrupt process to be described later, and the value of the variation type counter CS2 is obtained when the variation display result at the start of variation display in the main display unit 133 and at the variation start time of the symbol by the symbol display device 31. Is done.

<Various processes executed by main controller 140>
Next, a process executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 will be described. Note that the MPU 142 executes a main process that starts when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that starts when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. This process is started periodically by the MPU 142 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S1401, various winning detection sensors 21a, 22d, 120a, and 121c are read. The reading process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a winning for the upper working port 120 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 120a corresponding to the upper working port 120.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1502. The counter for three prize balls is for counting the number of times a three prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls should be output.

  After executing the process of step S1502, the processes of steps S1503 to S1504 are executed. The processing in steps S1503 to S1504 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, a negative determination is made in step S1503, or if the process of step S1504 is executed, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not a prize for the lower working port 121 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 121c corresponding to the lower operation port 121.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1506. After executing the process of step S1506, the processes of steps S1507 to S1508 are executed. The processing in steps S1507 to S1508 will be described later.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a winning at the upper operating port 120 and a winning at the lower operating port 121 can occur simultaneously, so the above three awards are within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 29). It is possible that the process of adding 1 to the ball counter is performed twice.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1505, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the processing in step S1508 is executed, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a prize has been generated for the general winning opening 21. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 21a corresponding to the general winning opening 21.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, 1 is added to the 10 winning ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1510. The 10-award ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10-award ball command for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out 10 gaming balls should be output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, or if the process of step S15010 has been executed, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not a winning to the variable winning device 22 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the variable winning device 22. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, the main reading process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, one is added to the four prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1512, and the main reading process ends. The four prize ball counter is for counting the number of times a four prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls should be output.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29), after executing the process of step S1401, the random number initial value counter CINI3 is updated in step S1402. In the subsequent step S1403, the big hit random number counter C4, the reach random number counter C5, and the electric accessory release counter C6 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C4, the reach random number counter C5, and the electric accessory release counter C6 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In the subsequent step S1404, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 125 is executed. In the through winning process, when the winning to the through gate 125 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 144c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C6 updated in step S1403 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 144c. In addition, display control of the second reserved lamp unit 136 is executed in order to light the second reserved lamp unit 136 corresponding to the number of stored items reserved.

  Thereafter, in step S1405 to step S1414, a winning process for the operation port is executed. In the winning process for the operating opening, first, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the upper operating opening 120. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S1501.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, whether or not the starting reserved ball number NE stored in the reserved number storage area NE of the reserved ball storage area 144a in step S1406 is less than an upper limit value (eg, “4”). Determine. If the starting reserved ball number NE is the upper limit value, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is, and if the starting reserved ball number NE is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, 1 is added to the number of starting reserved balls NE. In subsequent step S1408, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C4 and the reach random number counter C5 grasped in step S1403 is stored in the holding area RA of the holding ball storage area 144a as holding information. In this case, it is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RA1 to RA4 of the reserved area RA, that is, in the reserved areas RA1 to RA4 corresponding to the current starting reserved ball number NE.

  In subsequent step S1409, display control of the first holding lamp unit 135 is executed in order to turn on the first holding lamp unit 135 corresponding to the starting reserved ball number NE.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1405, or if the process of step S1409 is executed, it is determined in step S1410 whether or not a prize for the lower working port 121 has occurred. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S1505. If a negative determination is made in step S1410, the timer interrupt process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1410, the processing in steps S1411 to 1414 is executed. The processing from step S1411 to step S1414 is the same as the processing from step S1406 to step S1409. In this pachinko machine 10, a winning at the upper operating port 120 and a winning at the lower operating port 121 can occur at the same time, so that the holding ball storage area 144a is reserved within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. It is possible that the process of storing the hold information in the area RA is performed twice.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing from step S1601 to step S1608 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1609 and S1610 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S1601, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for opening / closing execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In the subsequent step S1602, the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S1603, a game times control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game times control process, determination of success / failure is performed, and setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31 and display control of the main display unit 133 are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S1604, a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S1605, a power support process for driving and controlling the motor combination 121a provided in the lower working port 121 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the electronic combination release of whether or not to make the electric combination 121a open using the numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C6 stored in the electronic combination holding area 144c of the RAM 144. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 121a is executed. Further, display control of the accessory display unit 134 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Here, as already described, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory 121a, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. Is called. When “1” is set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144, the high frequency support mode is set. When “1” is not set in the flag, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the electronic role support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not “1” is set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144. In the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won, the number of times that the electric accessory 121a is opened is set more than in the low frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 121a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the completion of one open state. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if “1” is set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In a succeeding step S1606, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, on the condition that the launch permission signal output from the power source and launch control device 80 is input based on the launch operation being performed, a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 sec. ), The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 is excited once. Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S1607, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 144. The power failure flag is set when a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 65 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 142, and is cleared to “0” in the next main processing. It is.

  When “1” is not set in the power failure flag of the RAM 144, the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S1608. That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. The random number initial value counter CINI3 and the variation type counter CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S1609, the random number initial value counter CINI3 is updated, and in step S1610, the variation type counter CS2 is updated.

  If it is determined in step S1607 that the power failure flag of the RAM 144 is set to “1”, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S1611 is executed. In step S1611, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited. After that, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S1612, and access to the RAM 144 is prohibited in step S1613. Continue infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process executed in step S1603 in the normal process (FIG. 31) of the MPU 142 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a game times control process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether at least one of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 and the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more. To do. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the upper limit number of round games by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. Although details will be described later, the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC when the opening / closing execution mode is shifted.

  The round game counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games executed after the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Although details will be described later, when one round game is finished, the round game counter is incremented by 1, and the round game counter is not cleared to “0” until the open / close execution mode is finished.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S1702, that is, the game turn start process in steps S1702 to S1705 and the game turn progress process in steps S1706 to S1709. End control processing. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a prize is generated at the operation ports 120 and 121.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the main display unit 133 is in variable display, that is, whether or not one game is being executed. If the main display unit 133 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S1703 to S1705. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S1703, the number-of-holds storage area NE of the reservation ball storage area 144a is referred to, and the number of start-holding balls NE, which is the number of pieces of reservation information stored, is “0”. It is determined whether or not. The case where the starting reserved ball number NE is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 144a. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the starting reserved ball number NE is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S1704.

  In the data setting process, first, the starting reserved ball number NE is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RA1 of the holding area RA in the holding ball storage area 144a is moved to the execution area AP. Thereafter, a process of shifting data stored in each of the reserved areas RA1 to RA4 of the reserved area RA is executed.

  This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RA1 to the fourth reservation area RA4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RA1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RA2 → the first reserved area RA1, the third reserved area RA3 → the second reserved area RA2, the fourth reserved area RA4 → the third reserved area RA3. In the data setting process, a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 135 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed.

  After executing the process of step S1704, the fluctuation start process is executed in step S1705. In the variation start process, first, the success / failure determination process is executed. In the hit / not-match determination process, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 144.

  In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 143a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AP, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C4 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value relating to the jackpot random number counter C4 stored in the execution area AP with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 143a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the low probability jackpot information.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process is a big win. If the jackpot is won, stop result setting processing for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 133 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 143 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 144.

  When the result of the hit / no-go determination process is a jackpot winning, “1” is set to the jackpot flag in the RAM 144. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the result of the success / failure determination process in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is a jackpot winning.

  On the other hand, if the result of the success / failure determination process is not a big win, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 133 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the ROM 143 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 144. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  Next, a variable display period setting process is executed. In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS2 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if the result is not a jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C5 stored in the execution area AP is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS2 is acquired with reference to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 143, and the fluctuation The display time information is set in a variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS2 is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 143. Then, the variation display time information is set in the variation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach is generated is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of start-pending balls NE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variation display time does not vary according to the number of starting reserved balls NE and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs.

  After the change display time is set, a change command and a success / failure result command are set. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the information on the presence / absence of reach has not been included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 90 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence / absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The success / failure result command includes game result information. That is, the success / failure result command command includes jackpot result information and missed result information as game result information.

  The change command and the success / failure result command are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31). When the sound emission control device 90 receives a command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound light emission control device 90 stores the command in the RAM 94. The RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the MPU 142 of the main control unit 140, and commands received from the MPU 142 of the main control unit 140 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. As the data is read, it is sequentially read according to the stored order. Here, the processing of the sound emission control device 90 corresponding to the command received from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the change command and the success / failure result command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S1801: YES), the content of the success / failure result command is set in step S1802. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is a jackpot result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, a symbol determination process corresponding to the big win is executed in step S1803. Specifically, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the type of symbol combination and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1802, a symbol determination process for removal is executed in step S1804. In the out symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to the occurrence of out of reach display, and if it is a game time related to the occurrence of out of reach reach, Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of outlier reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined.

  In addition, when it is not a game turn related to occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not stopped on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the combination of outreach symbols is also stopped. Information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as information of the current stop result.

  When the process of step S1803 is executed, or when the process of step S1804 is executed, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed in step S1805. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the change display time corresponding to the change command and the success / failure result command received this time is selected and the content of the effect is selected. In the MPU 92, according to the effect pattern determined in step S1805, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the current game round is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S1806, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S1803 or step S1804 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S1805 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for performing the current game play effect on the symbol display device 31 from the program ROM 103, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 105 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 31, the effect for the game turn is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and the stop result determined by the MPU 92 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  Returning to the description of the processing in step S1705 of the game times control process (FIG. 32), after setting the variation command and the success / failure result command, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 133 to start the variation. End the process.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the game turn progression processing in steps S1706 to S1709 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S1706, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S1707. Specifically, the display mode in the main display unit 133 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S1708. In the change end process, the information of the stop result stored in the RAM 144 is specified, and the main display unit 133 is controlled to display the pattern form corresponding to the information on the main display unit 133.

  In step S1709, after setting the change end command, the game times control process is ended. The change end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31). The sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 90 or the display control apparatus 100, without transmitting a change end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process executed in step S1604 in the normal process (FIG. 31) of the MPU 142 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether at least one of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 and the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more. To do. As described above, the round counter RC is a counter for specifying the upper limit number of round games by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. Although details will be described later, the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC when the opening / closing execution mode is shifted.

  The round game counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games executed after the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Although details will be described later, when one round game is finished, the round game counter is incremented by 1, and the round game counter is not cleared to “0” until the open / close execution mode is finished.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1902, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 133 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the game result of the game times ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot flag of the RAM 144. As described above, the jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the result of the current determination process is a jackpot winning in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. When the result of the determination process is a jackpot winning, “1” is set to the jackpot flag in the RAM 144. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, a round number distribution lottery process is executed in step S1904. The round number distribution lottery process is a process performed to select any distribution table from a plurality of types of distribution tables. The distribution table is used to specify the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  In the present embodiment, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 100 times. In this embodiment, instead of setting “100” to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are referred to by referring to the distribution table. The upper limit number of round games corresponding to the value of the provided round game counter is set in the round counter RC.

  In the distribution table, the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 and the numerical information of the round game counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are 1: 1. It is set corresponding to.

  Each distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each distribution table.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the case of the distribution table 1, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in one opening / closing execution mode is set to two. Has been. Specifically, when the round game counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are “0” and “50”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “50”. "Is set.

  In the case of the distribution table 2, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to three. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, the value set in the round counter RC is It is set to “30”.

  In the case of the distribution table 3, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in one opening / closing execution mode is set to three. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, the value set in the round counter RC is “40” is set.

  In the case of the allocation table 4, the number of times that the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to four times. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50” and “80”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, the value is set in the round counter RC. The value to be set is set to “10”.

  In the case of the distribution table 5, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to four times. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, the value set in the round counter RC is When “10” is set and the round game counter is “80”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “30”.

  In the case of the distribution table 6, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to four. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, the value set in the round counter RC is When “10” is set and the round game counter is “80”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “40”.

  In the case of the distribution table 7, the number of times that the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in one opening / closing execution mode is set to five. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70”, “80” and “90”, the round The value set in the counter RC is set to “10”.

  In the case of the distribution table 8, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to five. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50” and “90”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70” and “80”, the round The value set in the counter RC is set to “10”.

  In the case of the distribution table 9, the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to five. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70” and “80”, the value is set in the round counter RC. When the value to be set is “10” and the round game counter is “90”, the value set to the round counter RC is set to “30”.

  In the case of the distribution table 10, the number of times that the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 during one opening / closing execution mode is set to five. Specifically, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”, and when the round game counter is “70” and “80”, the value is set in the round counter RC. When the value to be set is “10” and the round game counter is “90”, the value set to the round counter RC is set to “40”.

  According to this embodiment, referring to the distribution table provided in the ROM 143, the upper limit number of round games corresponding to the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set in the round counter RC. . Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the round counter RC is “0”, the total number of round games executed in one open / close execution mode has not reached 100 times. , Move to the release period. The said cancellation | release period is a period for satisfy | filling the cancellation | release conditions mentioned later to a player. When the cancellation condition is satisfied, the upper limit number of round games is set again in the round counter RC, and the next round game is started. That is, according to the present embodiment, the next round game is not started unless the release condition is satisfied in the release period.

  A plurality of types of distribution tables are set, and the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is different according to each distribution table. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is not notified to the player. Therefore, the player cannot grasp how long the round game will continue. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the upper limit number of round games, so that the player can be attracted to the game.

  The number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 differs depending on the type of the distribution table. That is, the number of times that the release period occurs differs depending on the type of the distribution table. When a cancellation period occurs, it is necessary to establish a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period, so the number of times that the cancellation period occurs may affect the time required to consume 100R of the round game. high. According to this configuration, the player can be focused not only on the upper limit number of round games but also on the number of times the release period occurs.

  Even if the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 differs according to the type of the distribution table, the round set in the round counter RC The upper limit of the number of games is set to be the same halfway. Specifically, when the round game counter is “0”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “50”. When the round game counter is “50”, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “50” in the distribution table 1 in which the number of times the release period occurs is 1, and the release period occurs. In the distribution tables 2 to 10 having the number of times greater than 1, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “20”. Further, when the round game counter is “70”, in the distribution table 2 in which the release period is generated twice, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “30”. 3, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “40”, and in the distribution tables 4 to 10 in which the number of times the release period occurs is more than 2, the value set in the round counter RC is “ 10 ". When the round game counter is “80”, the value set in the round counter RC is “20” in the distribution table 4 in which the number of times that the release period occurs is 3 times. In the distribution table 5, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “30”, and in the distribution table 6, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “40”. In the distribution tables 7 to 10 in which the number of occurrences of 4 is 4, the value set in the round counter RC is set to “10”. Here, if the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is different for each allocation table, the type of the allocation table selected at an early stage is specified by the player. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC differs according to the type of the distribution table, the round game set in the round counter RC The upper limit of the number of times is set to be the same halfway. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the attention level for the upper limit number of round games and the number of times that the release period is generated from being reduced by identifying the type of the distribution table to the players at an early stage.

  The distribution table 3, the distribution table 5, the distribution table 6, the distribution table 8, the distribution table 9, and the distribution table 10 are stored in various counter areas of the RAM 144 in a situation where a round game is digested 100R. The upper limit number of round games is set so that the round counter RC provided in 144b is “1” or more. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the round game is consumed by 100R, when the round counter RC is “1” or more, the winning / not-lotting mode is set to the high probability mode. On the other hand, in the distribution table 1, the distribution table 2, the distribution table 4, and the distribution table 7, the round counter RC becomes “0” in a situation where 100R of the round game is consumed. When the round counter RC is “0” in a situation where the round game is consumed by 100R, the winning / not-lotting mode is set to the low probability mode. According to this configuration, when the round counter RC becomes “1” or more after 100R digestion, the high probability mode is set. When the round counter RC becomes “0” after 100R digestion, the low probability mode is set. Is set. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage over the selection of the distribution table with the round counter RC being “1” or more.

  Returning to the description of the round number distribution lottery process executed in step S1904 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 34), in the round number distribution lottery process, first, the distribution counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are set. Read the value. For example, the distribution counter is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Then, with reference to the lottery table provided in the ROM 143, it is determined whether the distribution counter value corresponds to any distribution table. In the lottery table, the numerical range of the distribution counter and the type of each distribution table are set in a one-to-one correspondence.

  Specifically, when the numerical range of the distribution counter is “0-4”, it corresponds to the distribution table 1, and when the numerical range of the distribution counter is “5-9”, When it corresponds to the minute table 2 and the numerical range of the distribution counter is “10 to 14”, it corresponds to the distribution table 3 and the numerical range of the distribution counter is “15 to 19”. In some cases, it corresponds to the distribution table 4, and when the numerical range of the distribution counter is “20 to 29”, it corresponds to the distribution table 5, and the numerical range of the distribution counter is “30”. ”To 39” corresponds to the distribution table 6, and when the numerical value range of the distribution counter is “40 to 69”, it corresponds to the distribution table 7 and the numerical value of the distribution counter. Corresponds to the distribution table 8 when the range is "70-79" If the numerical value range of the distribution counter is “80 to 89”, it corresponds to the distribution table 9. If the numerical value range of the distribution counter is “90 to 99”, the distribution table 10 is supported.

  According to this configuration, the distribution table in which the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is greater in the round counter RC than the upper limit number of round games. It is easier to select than a sorting table that is set less frequently. Specifically, the probability that the allocation table 1 in which the upper limit number of round games is set to the round counter RC is two is 5%, and the upper limit number of round games is set to the round counter RC. The probability that any one of the distribution tables 2 to 3 in which the number of times is set is 3 is selected is 10%, and the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is 4 times. The probability that any one of the distribution tables 4 to 6 is selected is 25%, and any one of the distribution tables 7 to 10 in which the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is 5 times. The probability of being selected is 60%. Here, when the number of times that the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is smaller, the probability of being selected becomes higher, and the process of establishing a release condition for releasing the release period for the player is established. Will occur fewer times. In that respect, according to this configuration, since a distribution table with a large number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is easily selected, a release condition for releasing the release period is established for the player. It is possible to prevent the number of times the process is generated from decreasing.

  When the process of step S1904 is executed, the distribution table selected in the round number distribution lottery process executed in step S1904 is read out to the RAM 144 in step S1905.

  In the subsequent step S1906, referring to the distribution table read to the RAM 144, the number of rounds corresponding to the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to the round counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. Set to RC. As will be described later, since the round game counter is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the round game counter is set to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode is entered. In step S1906, the upper limit number of round games corresponding to “0” in the round game counter is set in the round counter RC. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, “50” is set in the round counter RC.

  Returning to the description of step S1906 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 34), in addition to setting the upper limit number of round games in the round counter RC in step S1906, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set. “1000” is set as the waiting period for the opening. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting period is arbitrary.

  In step S1907, an opening command is set. The opening command includes information on the number of rounds set in the round counter RC. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the opening command and performs an effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the number of rounds set in the round counter RC. Run. In accordance with the set production pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  The sound emission control device 90 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the effect setting processing for the opening / closing execution mode to the display control device 100. Based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, the display control device 100 reads a data table from the program ROM 103 to perform an effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 31, and sets an image update timing predetermined according to the data table. Each time (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec), a drawing list is output to the VDP 105. Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  In the present embodiment, the opening effect is displayed on the display screen G during the waiting period for the opening. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and “Round game start!” Is displayed adjacent to the character. As a result, it is possible to easily notify the player that a round game will be started from now on.

  When the process of step S1907 is executed, the jackpot flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S1908, and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a special prize opening / closing process is executed in step S1909. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is open. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “100”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is. As described above, the round game counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games executed after the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. By providing the process of step S2002, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the special winning opening 22a described later from being performed in a situation where the number of executions of the round game is 100.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2002, it is determined in step S2003 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a transition is made to the release period, the next round game is started when the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied. On the other hand, when the round counter RC is “1” or more, since the transition to the release period does not occur, the next round game is started even if the release condition is not satisfied. Therefore, by providing the process in step S2003, it is possible to make the process different until the process for opening the special winning opening 22a described later is performed according to the situation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not “1” is set in the pre-opening flag of the RAM 144. The pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that the opening effect has not yet occurred in a situation where the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. Although details will be described later, when a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is satisfied, the round game is started after the opening effect is generated. Therefore, by providing the processing of step S2005, when a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is established, a grand prize opening process for opening the special prize opening 22a, which will be described later, is generated after the opening effect is generated. It is possible to make it happen.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2005, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S2006. In the large winning opening opening process, first, “2” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144. The winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for specifying the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a which is one end condition of the round game in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  Next, “1500” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started (every 2 msec), the value is set in the timer counter. After 3 seconds, the timer counter T becomes “0”. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for the opening time until the variable winning device 22 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and 3 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. However, when the launch operation is continuously performed during the opening time, the opening time is arbitrary as long as the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a, which is one end condition of the round game, is reached. is there. Next, a release execution process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 22c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 22a is opened.

  When the process of step S2006 is executed, an opening command is set in step S2007, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 first executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a and the output control of the speaker unit 55. Execute.

  Next, an opening command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make the display control apparatus 100 recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 22a is started. The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referenced in the data table based on the received release command. Thereby, on the display screen G, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the processes in steps S2008 to S2013 are executed. The processing in steps S2008 to S2013 is the same as the processing in steps S1306 to S1311.

  When the process of step S2013 is executed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is decremented by 1 in step S2014, and the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is subsequently determined in step S2015. Add one.

  In subsequent step S2016, it is determined whether or not the round game counter is "100". As described above, in this embodiment, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 100 times. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2016, it is possible to make subsequent processes different depending on whether or not the total number of executions of the round game has reached 100.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2016, it is determined in step S2017 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2017, "500" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2018, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The value set in the timer counter T is the time from when the special winning opening 22a is closed to when it is opened.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2017, a notification command is set in step S2019, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. In the present embodiment, in a situation where the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, when the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is less than “100”, Before the upper limit number of round games are set in the round counter RC, the process proceeds to the release period. As described above, when a transition is made to the release period, the next round game is started when a release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the release condition is set such that the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 becomes a preset number of winnings during the releasing period.

  The notification command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is the timing to notify that a winning to the operation ports 120 and 121 is generated. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 33, when the sound emission control device 90 receives a notification command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S1807: YES), the light emission of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command in step S1808. While performing control, the output control of the speaker part 55 is performed.

  In step S1809, the notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Here, processing corresponding to the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives a notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2101: YES), the display control device 100 transmits information for displaying a notification image to the VDP 105 in step S2102. . Thereby, the notification image is displayed on the display screen G. The notification image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification image.

  As shown in FIG. 38, an enlarged image of the game board 20 centered on the operation ports 120 and 121 is displayed on the display screen G, and “Aim the operation port!” Is displayed in accordance with the image. An arrow is displayed toward the operation ports 120 and 121. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to alert | report to a player easily that it is the situation which produces | generates the winning to the operation opening 120,121. Further, in the situation where the image is displayed on the display screen G, when the game ball wins the operation opening 120, 121, the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 causes the sound emission control device 90 to stop displaying the image. A stop command is sent. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the stop command as it is to the display control device 100. As a result, the image is not displayed.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 36), the process when the determination in step S2003 is affirmative (the process of step S2020) will be described. Here, before describing the processing of step S2020, the processing of steps S1503 to S1504 and steps S1507 to S1508 of the reading processing (FIG. 30) will be described.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is less than “100”. If this is the case, the transition to the release period occurs. In the present embodiment, the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is set such that the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 during the cancellation period is a preset number of winnings. The processing from step S1503 to step S1504 and step S1507 to step S1508 of the reading process (FIG. 30) is performed to count the number of game balls won in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period.

  As shown in FIG. 30, when the winning to the upper working port 120 occurs (step S1501: YES), when 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 144 in step S1502, In step S1503, it is determined whether the cancellation period is in progress. Specifically, whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0” and the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more and less than “100”. Determine whether or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, “1” is added to the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1504. The working opening winning counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have won the operating openings 120 and 121 during the release period by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1503, the processing from step S1505 is executed. By providing the process of step S1503, the number of game balls won to the upper operation port 120 in a situation not during the release period is counted as the number of game balls won to the upper operation port 120 during the release period. It becomes possible to stop.

  Similarly, when a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 121 (step S1505: YES), 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1506, and in step S1507. It is determined whether or not the release period is in progress. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S1503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, “1” is added to the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S1508. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1507, the processing from step S1509 is executed. By providing the process of step S1507, the number of game balls won to the lower operation port 121 in a situation that is not during the release period is counted as the number of game balls won to the lower operation port 121 during the release period. It becomes possible to stop.

  It should be noted that since the winning to the upper working port 120 and the winning to the lower working port 121 can occur simultaneously within the range of one reading process, the working port winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the release period. It is possible that the processing to be performed is performed twice.

  Further, as described above, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode regardless of whether or not the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144 is set to “1”. . Even during the release period, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of whether or not the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144 is set to “1”.

  According to the present embodiment, the cancellation period is canceled when the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the cancellation period becomes the number of winnings corresponding to the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period. Thereby, since the process for establishing the release condition in the release period is added to the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 36), when an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, a cancellation condition-related process is executed in step S2020. In the cancellation condition related process, a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is determined by lottery, and it is specified whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied in the cancellation period. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a cancellation condition related process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first release condition flag of the RAM 144. The first release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the first release condition. When the first release condition is selected in the lottery process for determining the release condition for releasing the release period described later, the first release condition flag is set to “1”, and the release condition is satisfied. "0" is cleared. By providing the process of step S2201, in the situation where the first release condition is set as the release condition for releasing the release period, a lottery process for determining the release condition for releasing the release period described later is performed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2202 whether or not “1” is set in the second release condition flag of the RAM 144. The second release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the second release condition. When the second release condition is selected in the lottery process for determining the release condition for releasing the release period, which will be described later, the first release condition flag is set to “1”, and the release condition is satisfied "0" is cleared. By providing the process of step S2202, a lottery process for determining a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period described later is performed in a situation where the second cancellation condition is set as the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, release condition lottery processing is executed in step S2203. The cancellation condition lottery process is a process for specifying the type of cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period by lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first release condition and the second release condition are set as the release condition. Specifically, the first release condition is set to 10 winning openings 120 and 121 for releasing the release period, and the second release condition is the operation opening 120 and release for releasing the release period. The number of winnings to 121 is set to 100. Therefore, the first release condition is more easily established than the second release condition.

  In the release condition lottery process, a release condition table corresponding to the distribution table read to the RAM 144 is read. The release condition table is a table used to specify the type of release condition in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, and the numerical range of the release condition lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The types of release conditions are set in a one-to-one correspondence. The release condition lottery counter is incremented by 1 within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each release condition table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each release condition table.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when any of the distribution table 1, the distribution table 2, the distribution table 4, and the distribution table 7 has been read into the RAM 144, the release condition table 1 is selected. In the release condition table 1, the probability that the first release condition is selected is set to 30%, and the probability that the second release condition is selected is set to 70%. Specifically, when the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “0 to 29”, the first release condition is established. When the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “30 to 99”, 2 is a release condition.

  When any of the distribution table 3, the distribution table 5, and the distribution table 8 has been read into the RAM 144, the release condition table 2 is selected. In the release condition table 2, the probability that the first release condition is selected is set to 70%, and the probability that the second release condition is selected is set to 30%. Specifically, when the numerical range of the release condition lottery counter is “0 to 69”, the first release condition is established, and when the numerical range of the release condition lottery counter is “70 to 99”, 2 is a release condition.

  When either the distribution table 6 or the distribution table 9 is read out to the RAM 144, the release condition table 3 is selected. In the release condition table 3, the probability that the first release condition is selected is set to 80%, and the probability that the second release condition is selected is set to 20%. Specifically, when the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “0 to 79”, the first release condition is established. When the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “80 to 99”, 2 is a release condition.

  When the distribution table 10 has been read to the RAM 144, the release condition table 4 is selected. In the release condition table 4, the probability that the first release condition is selected is set to 90%, and the probability that the second release condition is selected is set to 10%. Specifically, when the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “0 to 89”, the first release condition is established, and when the numerical range of the lottery counter for release condition is “90 to 99”, 2 is a release condition.

  In any of the release condition tables 1 to 4, either the first release condition or the second release condition may be selected. Here, for example, when the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the first release condition is always set, and when the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the second release condition is always set. If comprised, the type of the success / failure lottery mode set after the opening / closing execution mode ends will be specified by the player from the type of release condition. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to be thrilled for a long period of time as to which winning / failing lottery mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this respect, according to this configuration, either the first release condition or the second release condition may be selected regardless of the type of the lottery mode set after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the type of the lottery mode set after the end of the opening / closing execution mode from the type of release condition. Therefore, the player can be thrilled for a long period of time as to which winning / failing lottery mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the release condition table 1 in which the transition to the low probability mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends and the release condition tables 2 to 4 in which the transition to the high probability mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends are compared, The release condition tables 2 to 4 are easier to select the first release condition than the table 1. As described above, the first release condition is more easily established than the second release condition. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where transfer to high probability mode occurs after completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode.

  When comparing each release condition table in which the transition to the high probability mode occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the probability that the first release condition is selected in the order of the release condition table 2, the release condition table 3, and the release condition table 4 is high. It has become. Here, the probability that the release condition table 2 is selected is 25%, the probability that the release condition table 3 is selected is 20%, and the probability that the release condition table 4 is selected is 10%. Therefore, according to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the cancellation | release condition table with the low probability of being selected was selected.

  Returning to the description of the release condition lottery process performed in step S2203 of the release condition related process (FIG. 39), after reading any release condition table into the RAM 144, the release conditions provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 The lottery counter value is read out, and it is determined whether the cancellation condition lottery counter value corresponds to any cancellation condition.

  When the first release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process (step S2204: YES), “1” is set to the first release condition flag of the RAM 144 in step S2205. As described above, the first release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the first release condition.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, or when the process of step S2205 is executed, a first release condition specifying process is executed in step S2206. The first release condition specifying process is a process performed in the release period until the first release condition is satisfied in the release period in which the first release condition is set. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a first release condition specifying process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1”. As described above, the operation opening prize counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have won the operation openings 120 and 121 during the release period by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, an effect symbol variation start command is set in step S2302. The effect design variation start command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that it is the timing to start the design variation display on the display screen G in the release period. The effect design change start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  The processing when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect design change start command is performed in the first cancellation period corresponding process in step S1810 of the effect determination process (FIG. 33). The first cancellation period handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first cancellation period handling process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the effect symbol variation start command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2401: YES), the effect symbol variation start is started in step S2402. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the command is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In the subsequent step S2403, the effect design change start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 has received the effect symbol variation start command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2103: YES), the display control device 100 on the display screen G in step S2104. Information for variably displaying symbols is transmitted to the VDP 105. Here, the effect displayed on the display screen G when the effect design change start command is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect corresponding to the effect symbol variation start command.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, on the display screen G, the variable display is performed so that the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction. The symbol variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is continuously performed until the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 in the release period reaches six.

  Here, in the normal game round, even when a winning to the operation ports 120 and 121 occurs, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Fluctuation display is performed.

  Returning to the description of the first release condition specifying process (FIG. 41), when a negative determination is made in step S2301, or when the process of step S2302 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2303. It is determined whether or not the winning number counter is “3”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, a specific effect command is set in step S2304. The specific effect command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is the timing for generating a specific effect on the display screen G. The specific effect command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the specific effect command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2404: YES), the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the specific effect command in step S2405. And the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In step S2406, the specific effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 has received the specific effect command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2105: YES), a specific effect on the display screen G in step S2106. Is transmitted to the VDP 105. Here, an image displayed on the display screen G when the specific effect command is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific effect.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), “Big hitting approach! Great chance !!” is displayed at the upper part of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower portion of the lower symbol row Z3. The specific effects are displayed until the number of winning entries to the operation ports 120 and 121 during the cancellation period reaches six. In addition, the specific effect can also occur in normal game times.

  Returning to the description of the first release condition specifying process (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2305 It is determined whether or not the winning number counter is “6”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, an effect reach command is set in step S2306. The effect reach command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is the timing for generating the reach effect on the display screen G in the release period. The effect reach command includes information of the distribution table read into the RAM 144. The effect reach command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect reach command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2407: YES), the display lamp corresponding to the effect reach command in step S2408. The light emission control of the unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S2409, effect design determination processing is executed. In the effect design determination process, the combination type of symbols to be finally stopped and the effective lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery or the like. In the present embodiment, the selection probability of each symbol is different between the case where the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after digesting 100R and the case where the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode.

  Specifically, in the effect design determination process, first, an effect design lottery table corresponding to the distribution table read into the RAM 144 is read with reference to the effect reach command. Specifically, in the case of the distribution table 3, the distribution table 5, the distribution table 6, the distribution table 8, the distribution table 9, and the distribution table 10, the production symbol lottery table A is selected and the distribution table 1 is selected. In the case of the distribution table 2, the distribution table 4, and the distribution table 7, the effect symbol lottery table B is selected.

  The effect symbol lottery table is a table used by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 to specify the type of stop symbol during the release period, and the effect symbol counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The numerical value range and the symbol type are set in a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the effect symbol counter is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Specifically, in the production symbol lottery table A, the probability that the “1” symbol is selected is set to 25%, and the probability that the “2” symbol is selected is set to 15%. The probability that the “3” symbol is selected is set to 20%, the probability that the “4” symbol is selected is set to 10%, and the probability that the “5” symbol is selected is set to 12%. The probability that the “6” symbol is selected is set to 3%, the probability that the “7” symbol is selected is set to 3%, and the probability that the “8” symbol is selected is 2 %, And the probability of selecting the “9” symbol is set to 10%. According to the effect symbol lottery table A, the probability that an odd symbol is selected is set to 70%, and the probability that an even symbol is selected is set to 30%. Further, when comparing every odd number of symbols excluding the “7” symbol, the selection probability is set to be lower as the number of the symbol is larger.

  In the production symbol lottery table B, the probability that the “1” symbol is selected is set to 15%, the probability that the “2” symbol is selected is set to 25%, and the symbol “3” is selected. The probability that the “4” symbol is selected is set to 20%, the probability that the “5” symbol is selected is set to 3%, and “6” is selected. The probability that a symbol is selected is set to 15%, the probability that a symbol “7” is selected is set to 0%, and the probability that a symbol “8” is selected is set to 10%. The probability of selecting the “9” symbol is set to 2%. According to the effect symbol lottery table B, the probability that an odd symbol is selected is set to 30%, and the probability that an even symbol is selected is set to 70%. Moreover, when comparing every odd symbol, it is set so that the selection probability decreases as the symbol number increases.

  According to this embodiment, when the high probability mode is set after 100R digestion, the odd symbol is easily selected, and when the low probability mode is set after 100R digestion, the even symbol is easily selected. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the user pay attention to which of the odd symbols and the even symbols is stopped and to expect to be an odd symbol.

  According to the present embodiment, the symbols “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” excluding the symbol “7” can be selected regardless of which winning / failing lottery mode is set. As described above, since the probability that the “7” symbol is selected is 3% when the effect symbol lottery table A is selected, the probability that the “7” symbol is selected is low. Here, in the case where the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed for each success / failure lottery mode is set, the type of the success / failure lottery mode that is set after 100R digestion is specified by the player at an early stage. In that regard, according to this configuration, since any symbol other than the “7” symbol can be selected regardless of which winning / failing lottery mode is set, the type of the winning / losing lottery mode set after 100R digestion is an early stage game. It becomes possible to prevent being specified by a person. This makes it possible for the player to play a round game while expecting that the high probability mode will be set after 100R digestion.

  In the effect symbol lottery table A, the odds of selection of odd numbers other than “7” symbols are set to be lower as the symbol number is larger. In the effect symbol lottery table B, the odds of selection of each odd symbol are the numbers of symbols. The larger the value, the lower it is set. Further, when the effect symbol lottery table A and the effect symbol lottery table B are compared, there is a higher probability that the effect symbol lottery table A is selected to be an odd-numbered symbol larger than the effect symbol lottery table B. According to this configuration, it is possible not only to notice that odd symbols are stopped and displayed, but also to pay attention to the types of odd symbols that are stopped and displayed.

  In the effect symbol lottery table A, “7” symbol distribution is set, but in the effect symbol lottery table B, “7” symbol allocation is not set. Therefore, when the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the high probability mode is set after 100R digestion. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the “7” symbol to be selected, and it is possible to enhance the sense of exhilaration when the “7” symbol is selected.

  When the process of step S2409 is executed, an effect reach command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in step S2410. The effect reach command includes information on the stop result specified in step S2409.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 has received the effect reach command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2107: YES), the information for generating the reach effect in step S2108 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send to. Here, an image displayed on the display screen G when the above-described effect reach command is received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.43 (c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect corresponding to the reach command for effects.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c), a reach display corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination determined in step S2409 is established occurs. Specifically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is in a state where the variable display is continued. The reach display is continuously performed until the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 in the release period reaches ten.

  Here, even when reach display occurs in the normal game times, reach display corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G is generated. Specifically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is in the state of the variable display.

  Returning to the description of the first release condition specifying process (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S2305, or if the process of step S2306 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2307 It is determined whether or not the winning number counter is “10”. If a negative determination is made in step S2307, the first cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, an effect stop symbol command is set in step S2308. The effect stop symbol command for production is a command for specifying by the sound emission control device 90 that it is the timing to stop and display the same stop symbol on the display screen G in the release period. The effect hitting stop symbol command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect stop symbol command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2411: YES), it responds to the effect stop command at step S2412. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed. In subsequent step S 2413, the effect stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives the effect stop symbol command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2109: YES), the display control device 100 executes a final stop setting process in step S2110. Specifically, a process of writing a data table for displaying the determined stop symbol until the predetermined period elapses from the program ROM 103 of the display control apparatus 100 to the work RAM 104 is executed. Thus, an image corresponding to the effect stop symbol command is displayed on the display screen G until the predetermined period has elapsed. The image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect corresponding to the effect stop symbol command for effect.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (d), the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. Here, even when the reach display corresponding to the big win is completed in the normal game round, the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period on the display screen G.

  According to the present embodiment, the effect generated on the display screen G in the release period in which the first release condition is set and the effect generated on the display screen G in the normal game times are set to be the same. Yes. This makes it possible for the player to play the release period as if playing a normal game round. Furthermore, according to the said structure, even if it does not alert | report a cancellation | release condition for canceling | releasing the said cancellation | release period, a round game starts by the same symbol combination being stopped and displayed on the display screen G It is possible to make it easier for the player to specify that the game is to be performed.

  Also, the symbol change display → The upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 display “Big hitting! Great chance!” → Reach occurrence → The combination of the same or non-identical symbols stops The effect (effect A) is an effect that has the highest probability of being selected when the result is a big win in a normal game round. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the first release condition is set to 10 winning prizes for the operation ports 120 and 121, and the second release condition is 100 winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121. It is set to pieces. Therefore, the period until the number of winning prizes to the operating ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 in the release period is the period when the player can get the most. Here, according to the present configuration, there is an effect that can be expected to win the biggest win in the period when the heat is most intense. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's feeling of exaltation and to expect that the first release condition is set.

  Returning to the description of the first release condition specifying process (FIG. 41), when the process of step S2308 is executed, the distribution table read to the RAM 144 in step S2309 is referred to, and the various counter areas of the RAM 144 in step S2310. The number of rounds corresponding to the round game counter provided in 144b is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of the distribution table 2, if the round game counter is “50”, the round counter RC is set to “20”, and the round game counter is “70”. For example, “30” is set in the round counter RC.

  In the subsequent step S2311, “1500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144, and the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is a period during which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, and 3 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. However, the time is arbitrary.

  In step S2312, the first release condition flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”, the pre-opening flag in the RAM 144 is set to “1”, and the first release condition specifying process ends. As described above, the pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that the opening effect has not yet occurred in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 in a situation where the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied. is there.

  Returning to the description of the release condition related process (FIG. 39), if a negative determination is made in step S2204, “1” is set to the second release condition flag in the RAM 144 in step S2207. As described above, the second release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the second release condition.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2207 is executed, a second release condition specifying process is executed in step S2208, and the release condition related process is terminated. The second release condition specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The said 2nd cancellation | release condition specific process is a process performed in the said cancellation | release period until the said 2nd cancellation | release condition is satisfied in the cancellation | release period in which the 2nd cancellation | release condition was set. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second release condition specifying process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, the processing in steps S2501 to S2506 is the same as the processing in steps S2301 to S2306. If a negative determination is made in step S2505, or if the process of step S2506 is executed, it is determined in step S2507 whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “10”. . As described above, the operation opening prize counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have won the operation openings 120 and 121 during the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, an effect stop stop symbol command is set in step S2508. The effect detachment stop command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that it is time to display a stop symbol corresponding to the detachment result on the display screen G in the release period. The above-described effect removal stop symbol command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31). The process in the case of receiving the above-described effect removal stop symbol command is performed in the second release period corresponding process in step S2414 of the first release period corresponding process (FIG. 42). The second release period handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a second cancellation period handling process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the above-described effect detachment stop command command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2601: YES), the sound emission control device 90 changes to the effect detachment stop design command in step S2602. The light emission control of the corresponding display lamp unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In the subsequent step S2603, the effect stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives the above-described effect removal stop symbol command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2111: YES), the display control device 100 executes a final stop setting process in step S2112. Specifically, a process of writing a data table for displaying the determined stop symbol until the predetermined period elapses from the program ROM 103 of the display control apparatus 100 to the work RAM 104 is executed. Thereby, the combination of the symbols which are not the same on the display screen G is stopped and displayed until the predetermined period elapses.

  According to the present embodiment, the effects generated on the display screen G are set to be the same for both the first release condition and the second release condition until the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 in the release period. Has been. Here, when the effect displayed on the display screen G when the game ball wins the operation port 120, 121 during the release period is different between the first release condition and the second release condition, Which of the first release condition and the second release condition is set in accordance with the contents of the effect displayed on the display screen G when the game ball wins the operation port 120, 121 during the release period It is specified by the player. In that regard, according to this configuration, the first cancellation condition and the second cancellation condition produce the same effects on the display screen G until the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 in the cancellation period. Is set to Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the type of release condition set from the effect generated on the display screen G at the time of winning the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period. Become.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), if a negative determination is made in step S2507, or if the process of step S2508 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2509 It is determined whether or not the winning number counter is the first predetermined value. Specifically, whether the above-mentioned operation opening prize counter is “11”, “21”, “31”, “41”, “51”, “61”, “71”, “81” or “91” Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, an effect lottery command is set in step S2510. The effect lottery command is a command for determining the type of effect to be displayed on the display screen G in the lottery. The effect lottery command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the effect A described above, a plurality of types of effects displayed on the display screen G are set. Specifically, symbol variation display → display a plurality of characters → reach occurrence → prohibition of the same or non-identical symbol combination (effect B), symbol variation display → one character display -> Reach occurrence-> Effect of producing the same or non-identical symbol combination (display C) and symbol change display-> Message display-> Reach occurrence-> Effect of combining the same or non-identical symbols (Production D) is set. However, the contents of the above effects and the number of effects are arbitrary. The effects B, C, and D occur in the normal game times as well as the effects A. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the result of success / failure is selected as an effect of the game times in which the success / failure results are won in the order of effect D, effect C, effect B, and effect A is set.

  According to this embodiment, even in the release period in which the second release condition is set, the effect displayed on the display screen G is set in the same manner as the effect displayed in the normal game times. According to this configuration, even when the release period occurs for a long period of time, it is possible for the player to play the release period as if playing a normal game round.

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect lottery command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2604: YES), the sound emission control device 90 performs an effect lottery process in step S2605. Specifically, first, the value of the effect lottery counter provided in the work RAM 104 is grasped. The effect lottery counter is used to specify one of the four effects. For example, the effect lottery counter is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Next, with reference to the effect specifying table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 included in the effect lottery command, the value of the effect lottery counter It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the production. In the effect specifying table, the numerical range of the effect lottery counter and each effect are set in a one-to-one correspondence.

  In the present embodiment, the effect specifying table is different according to the value of the operation opening prize counter. Specifically, in the case where the value of the operation opening prize counter is “11”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 1%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 4. %, The probability that the effect C is selected is 15%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 80%.

  In the case of the effect specification table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “21”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 3%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 7%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 20%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 70%. In the case of the effect specifying table corresponding to the value of the operation opening prize counter of “31”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 5%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 9%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 26%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 60%.

  In the case of the effect specification table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “41”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 7%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 11%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 32%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 50%. In the case of the effect identification table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “51”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 9%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 13%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 38%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 40%.

  In the case of the effect specifying table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “61”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 11%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 15%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 44%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 30%. In the case of the effect specification table corresponding to the value of the operation opening prize counter of “71”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 15%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 20%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 45%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 20%.

  In the case of the effect specifying table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “81”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 30%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 40%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 20%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 10%. In the case of the effect specification table corresponding to the value of the operation opening winning number counter “91”, the probability that the effect A is selected is 70%, and the probability that the effect B is selected is 25%. The probability that the effect C is selected is 4%, and the probability that the effect D is selected is 1%.

  According to the present embodiment, the selection probabilities for each effect differ according to the value of the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. Specifically, the larger the value of the operation opening prize counter is, the easier it is to select effect A or effect B. According to the said structure, while raising the degree of attention to the effect displayed on the display screen G in the cancellation | release period, the effect A or the effect B which is easy to be selected when cancellation conditions are satisfied is displayed on the display screen G It can be expected to be done.

  As described above, the effects displayed on the display screen G during the cancellation period are effects that can occur in normal game times, and the success / failure result is a big hit in the order of effects D, effects C, effects B, and effects A. It is easy to be selected as an effect of the winning game times. As described above, the effect A or the effect B is more easily selected as the value of the operation opening prize counter is larger. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to specify whether or not the release period can be expected from the type of effect displayed on the display screen G during the release period. It becomes.

  In any production specific table, distribution of each production is set. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the cancellation period is canceled regardless of which effect is displayed on the display screen G.

  After executing the process of step S2605, the type of effect selected in step S2605 is stored in the effect storage area provided in the work RAM 104 in step S2606. The effect storage area is an area for storing the effect specified in the effect lottery process.

  In step S2607, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the effect selected in step S2607 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In subsequent step S2608, a design symbol change start command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives the effect design change start command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2103: YES), the display control device 100 variably displays the design on the display screen G in step S2104. Information to be transmitted is transmitted to the VDP 105. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 43A, the variable display is performed so that the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction on the display screen G with periodicity. The symbol variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is continuously performed until the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the release period reaches a third predetermined value described later.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), if a negative determination is made in step S2509, or if the process of step S2510 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2511 It is determined whether or not the winning number counter is a second predetermined value. Specifically, whether the above-mentioned operation opening winning counter is “13”, “23”, “33”, “43”, “53”, “63”, “73”, “83” or “93”. Determine whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, a second predetermined value command is set in step S2512. The second predetermined value command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period has reached the second predetermined value. The second predetermined value command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the second predetermined value command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2609: YES), it responds to the second predetermined value command in step S2610. While performing the light emission control of the display lamp part 54, the output control of the speaker part 55 is performed. In subsequent step S2611, the information on the effect stored in the effect storage area of the work RAM 104 is stored in the second predetermined value command, and then transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control apparatus 100 receives the second predetermined value command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 (step S2113: YES), it is included in the second predetermined value command in step S2114. An effect image corresponding to the type of effect being displayed is displayed. Specifically, in the case of production A, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), “Big hitting approach! Great chance !!” is displayed at the upper part of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower portion of the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of effect B, a plurality of characters are displayed on the display screen G, and in the case of effect C, one character is displayed on the display screen G. In the case of production D, a message is displayed on the display screen G. The message is, for example, “Expect!”. The above production is continuously performed until the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the release period reaches a third predetermined value described later.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), when a negative determination is made in step S2511 or when the process of step S2512 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2513. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a third predetermined value. Specifically, the value of the operation opening winning counter is “16”, “26”, “36”, “46”, “56”, “66”, “76”, “86” or “96”. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2513, an effect reach command is set in step S2514. As described above, the effect reach command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is time to generate a reach effect on the display screen G in the release period. The effect reach command includes information of the distribution table read into the RAM 144. The effect reach command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect reach command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2407: YES), the display lamp corresponding to the effect reach command in step S2408. The light emission control of the unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S2409, effect design determination processing is executed. In the effect design determination process, the combination type of symbols to be finally stopped and the effective lines L1 to L5 are determined by lottery or the like. Specifically, the effect symbol lottery table corresponding to the distribution table read out to the RAM 144 is read, and a symbol combination corresponding to the value of the effect symbol counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is determined.

  In step S2410, the reach command for effect is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The effect reach command includes information on the stop result specified in step S2409.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 has received the effect reach command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2107: YES), the information for generating the reach effect in step S2108 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send to. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), a reach display corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols determined in step S2409 is established is generated. Specifically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is in a state where the variable display is continued. The reach display is continuously performed until the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the release period reaches a fourth predetermined value or 100, which will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), when a negative determination is made in step S2513, or when the process of step S2514 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2515. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a fourth predetermined value. Specifically, whether or not the value of the operation opening prize counter is “20”, “30”, “40”, “50”, “60”, “70”, “80” or “90” Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2515, an effect stop symbol command is set in step S2516. As described above, the production stop stop command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the stop timing corresponding to the release result is displayed on the display screen G in the release period. It is. The above-described effect removal stop symbol command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the above-described effect detachment stop command command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2601: YES), the sound emission control device 90 changes to the effect detachment stop design command in step S2602. The light emission control of the corresponding display lamp unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In the subsequent step S2603, the effect stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives the above-described effect removal stop symbol command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2111: YES), the display control device 100 executes a final stop setting process in step S2112. Specifically, a process of writing a data table for displaying the determined stop symbol until the predetermined period elapses from the program ROM 103 of the display control apparatus 100 to the work RAM 104 is executed. Thereby, the combination of the symbols which are not the same on the display screen G is stopped and displayed until the predetermined period elapses.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), if a negative determination is made in step S2515, or if the process of step S2516 is executed, the operation ports provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2517. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “100”. If a negative determination is made in step S2517, the second cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2517, an effect stop symbol command is set in step S2518. As described above, the per-design stop symbol command for effect is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the same stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen G in the release period. is there. The effect stop symbol command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the effect stop symbol command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2411: YES), it responds to the effect stop command at step S2412. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed. In subsequent step S 2413, the effect stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control device 100.

  As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control device 100 receives the effect stop symbol command from the sound emission control device 90 (step S2109: YES), the display control device 100 executes a final stop setting process in step S2110. Specifically, a process of writing a data table for displaying the determined stop symbol until the predetermined period elapses from the program ROM 103 of the display control apparatus 100 to the work RAM 104 is executed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G until a predetermined period elapses.

  Returning to the description of the second release condition specifying process (FIG. 44), after executing the process of step S2518, the distribution table read to the RAM 144 in step S2519 is referred to, and in the step S2520, various counters in the RAM 144 are read. The number of rounds corresponding to the round game counter provided in the area 144b is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144.

  In the subsequent step S2521, "1500" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144, and the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to "0". As described above, the numerical information set in the timer counter T is a period during which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, and 3 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In step S2522, the second release condition flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”, the pre-opening flag in the RAM 144 is set to “1”, and the second release condition specifying process ends. As described above, the pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that an opening effect has not yet occurred in a situation where a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is satisfied in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. is there.

  According to the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as the release condition is different between the first release condition and the second release condition. Here, as described above, when the high probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the first cancellation condition is easily selected, and when the low probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the second cancellation condition is easily selected. Therefore, the operation opening 120 required until the release period is canceled by adopting a configuration in which the winning numbers to the operation openings 120 and 121 serving as the release conditions are different between the first release condition and the second release condition. It is possible to allow the player to predict the type of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends from the number of winnings to 121.

  The first release condition is set to 10 winning holes in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period, and the second release condition is set to 100 winning numbers in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period. Has been. Here, as described above, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/10, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/100. If the jackpot winning probability is 1/10, the average number of winnings to the operating ports 120, 121 until winning the jackpot is 10, and if the jackpot winning probability is 1/100, until the jackpot winning The number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 is 100. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the first release condition and the operating ports 120 and 121 required for winning the big win in the situation where the high probability mode is set The average number of winnings is set to be the same, and the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the second release condition and the operation required to win a big win in the situation where the low probability mode is set The average number of winnings to the mouths 120 and 121 is set to be the same. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily imagine the type of the success / failure lottery mode that is set after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, based on the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 required until the cancellation period is canceled.

  Each time a transition to the release period occurs, a release condition lottery process for specifying the release condition is performed. Here, assuming that the release condition lottery process is performed only once, the player can be thrilled with the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Can not. Further, with this configuration, when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to this configuration, the cancellation condition lottery process for specifying the cancellation condition is performed every time the shift to the cancellation period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Furthermore, according to this configuration, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, the release condition in the subsequent release period is not always set as the second release condition. Accordingly, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 36), the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0” (step S2004: YES), and the pre-opening flag of the RAM 144 is “1”. If it is set (step S2005: YES), “1000” is set as the waiting period for opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2021. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting period is arbitrary.

  In step S2022, an opening command is set. The opening command includes information on the number of rounds set in the round counter RC. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 refers to the opening command and performs an effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the number of rounds set in the round counter RC. Run. In accordance with the set production pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  The sound emission control device 90 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the effect setting processing for the opening / closing execution mode to the display control device 100. Based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, the display control device 100 reads a data table for performing the opening / closing execution mode effect on the symbol display device 31 from the program ROM 103, and updates an image determined in advance according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 105 at each timing (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  In the present embodiment, even when the release period is released, the next round game is started after a waiting period for the opening. During the opening standby period, the opening effect is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, a character is displayed on the display screen G, and “Round game start!” Is displayed adjacent to the character.

  According to the present embodiment, when the cancellation period is canceled, the round game is started after the same opening effect is generated on the display screen G as in the case where the big win is won in the normal game round. Here, even if the effect displayed on the display screen G in the release period and the effect displayed on the display screen G in the normal game times are set to be the same, the same symbol combination If the effects displayed on the display screen G are different from when the round display is started until the round game is started, the player is allowed to play the release period as if playing a normal game round. There is a risk that you will not be able to. In that respect, according to this configuration, not only the effects displayed on the display screen G in the release period, but also the display screen G from when the combination of the same symbols is stopped to the start of the round game. The effects displayed on the display screen G are also set to be the same as the effects displayed on the display screen G after the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed in the normal game round and before the round game is started. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player easily assume that the release period is a normal game time.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 36), when the process of step S2022 is executed, the pre-opening flag of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S2023, and the big prize opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  Next, processing performed after an affirmative determination in step S2016 will be described. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2016 is a case where the number of round games executed after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode becomes 100.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2016, "2000" is set as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S2024. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting period is arbitrary.

  In subsequent step S2025, an ending command is set, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31). The ending command includes numerical information of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the ending command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 first executes an ending handling process. In the ending handling process, first, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  Next, with reference to the ending command received this time, the numerical information of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is grasped. When the round counter RC is “1” or more, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is determined as the current ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the round counter RC is “0”, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is determined as the ending effect of this time.

  After executing the ending handling process, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of the ending handling process is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. When the display control device 100 receives the ending command, the display control device 100 specifies the content of the lottery result included in the ending command, and displays the ending effect corresponding to the content of the lottery result on the display screen G. . Specifically, when the round counter RC is “1” or more, “Once again!” Is displayed on the display screen G, and when the round counter RC is “0”, Will display “See you again!”.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 34), when the process of step S1909 is executed, it is determined in step S1910 whether or not the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “100”. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S1910, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1910, it is determined in step S1911 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1912. The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more. As described above, in this embodiment, the type of the lottery mode to be set is different depending on whether or not the round counter RC is “1” or more at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, by providing the processing, it is possible to set the type of the winning / losing lottery mode according to the situation.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, if “1” is not set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 144 in step S2702, “1” is set in the high probability mode flag, and the high probability mode flag has already been set. If “1” is set in, that state is maintained.

  In subsequent step S2703, if “1” is not set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144, “1” is set in the high frequency support flag, and “1” is already set in the high frequency support flag. If so, the state is maintained and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2701, if “1” is set in the high probability mode flag of the RAM 144 in step S2704, the high probability mode flag is cleared to “0” and the high probability mode has already been set. When the flag is “0”, the state is maintained.

  If “1” is set in the high frequency support flag of the RAM 144 in the subsequent step S2705, the high frequency support flag is cleared to “0”, and if the high frequency support flag is already “0”, This state is maintained, and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 34), when the process of step S1912 is executed, the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S1913, and “ “0” is cleared for the release condition flag for which “1” is set.

  When the process of step S1913 is executed, it is determined in step S1914 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1914, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1914, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S1915, and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a time chart showing the flow of the game, FIG. 47 (a) shows the timing of winning the jackpot, FIG. 47 (b) shows the period during which the gaming state is in the opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. ) Shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 47 (d) shows the period when the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more, and FIG. 47 (e) shows the release period. 47 (f) shows the timing at which the release condition lottery process is performed, FIG. 47 (g) shows the timing at which the set release condition is satisfied, and FIG. 47 (h) shows that the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Indicates the set period. Here, the time chart will be described by taking as an example a case where the distribution table 3 is selected at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a) at the timing of t1, when the jackpot is won, the gaming state shifts to the opening / closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 47 (b) at the same timing.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c), a round game execution period occurs from the timing t1 to t2. Specifically, at the timing of t1, the selected allocation table is referred to, and the upper limit number of round games corresponding to the value of the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set in the various counter areas of the RAM 144. Set to the round counter RC provided at 144b. In the case of the distribution table 3, “50” is set in the round counter RC. Thereby, a round game with 50R as the upper limit number of times is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2.

  From the timing t1 to the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 47D, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “1” or more. The round counter RC is decremented by 1 every time one round game is executed, and 1 is added to the round game counter every time a round game is executed.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of distribution tables are set, and the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is different according to each distribution table. In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is not notified to the player. Therefore, the player cannot grasp how long the round game will continue. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the upper limit number of round games, so that the player can be attracted to the game.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c) at the timing of t2, the execution period of the round game started at the timing of t1 ends. Specifically, the round game for the number of rounds set in the round counter RC at the timing of t1 ends. In the case of the distribution table 3, the execution period of the round game with 50R as the upper limit number at the timing of t2 ends.

  At the same timing, as shown in FIG. 47D, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “0”. In addition, the round game counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 at the same timing are the total number of round games executed after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the distribution table 3, the round game counter is “50”.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (e), the release period starts at the timing of t2. The cancellation period occurs until a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is satisfied, and is canceled when the cancellation condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the cancellation period is canceled when the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the cancellation period becomes the number of winnings corresponding to the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period. According to this configuration, since the process for establishing the release condition in the release period is added to the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (f), the release condition lottery process for specifying the release condition for the current release period is performed at the timing of t2. In the release condition lottery process, one of the release conditions is selected from the first release condition and the second release condition. When the first release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, “1” is set in the first release condition flag of the RAM 144. The first release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the first release condition.

  On the other hand, when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, “1” is set in the second release condition flag of the RAM 144. The second release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the second release condition.

  When the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied as shown in FIG. 47 (g) at the timing of t3, the release period ends at the same timing as shown in FIG. 47 (e). When the release period ends, any release condition flag for which “1” is set is cleared to “0”.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c), a round game execution period occurs from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Specifically, referring to the selected allocation table at the timing of t3, the upper limit number of round games corresponding to the value of the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to the various counter areas of the RAM 144. Set to the round counter RC provided at 144b. In the case of the distribution table 3, “20” is set in the round counter RC. Thereby, a round game with 20R as the upper limit number of times is performed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4.

  From the timing t3 to the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 47D, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “1” or more.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c) at the timing of t4, the execution period of the round game started at the timing of t3 ends. Specifically, the round game for the number of rounds set in the round counter RC at the timing of t3 ends. In the case of the distribution table 3, the execution period of the round game with 20R as the upper limit number at the timing of t4 ends.

  At the same timing, as shown in FIG. 47D, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “0”. In addition, the round game counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 at the same timing are the total number of round games executed after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of the distribution table 3, the round game counter is “70”.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (e) at the timing of t4, the release period is started, and the release condition lottery process is performed at the timing as shown in FIG. 47 (f). As described above, in the release condition lottery process, one of the release conditions is selected from the first release condition and the second release condition. When the first release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, “1” is set in the first release condition flag of the RAM 144, and when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, the RAM 144 "1" is set in the second release condition flag.

  According to the present embodiment, the cancel condition lottery process for specifying the cancel condition is performed every time the transition to the cancel period occurs. Here, assuming that the release condition lottery process is performed only once, the player can be thrilled with the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Can not. Further, with this configuration, when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to this configuration, the cancellation condition lottery process for specifying the cancellation condition is performed every time the shift to the cancellation period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Furthermore, according to this configuration, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, the release condition in the subsequent release period is not always set as the second release condition. Accordingly, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (g) at the timing of t5, when the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied, the release period ends at the same timing as shown in FIG. 47 (e). When the release period ends, any release condition flag for which “1” is set is cleared to “0”.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c) at the timing of t5, the execution period of the round game is started. Specifically, referring to the selected distribution table at the timing of t5, the upper limit number of round games corresponding to the value of the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set to the various counter areas of the RAM 144. Set to the round counter RC provided at 144b. In the case of the distribution table 3, “40” is set in the round counter RC.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (c) at the timing of t6, the round game execution period started at the timing of t5 ends. At the same timing, the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “100”. In the present embodiment, since the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 100, the round game is ended when the round game counter reaches “100”.

  Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “1” or more. Specifically, in the case of the distribution table 3, the round counter RC is “10”.

  At the same timing, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), a period in which the high probability mode is set as the success / failure lottery mode is started. Specifically, “1” is set to the high probability mode flag of the RAM 144 at the same timing.

  According to the present embodiment, in a situation where the round game is digested by 100R, when the round counter RC is “1” or more, the winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the round counter RC is “0”. In this case, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage over the selection of the distribution table with the round counter RC being “1” or more.

  As shown in FIG. 47B, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t7. At the same timing, as shown in FIG. 47D, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the cancellation period is canceled when the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the cancellation period becomes the number of winnings corresponding to the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period. Thereby, since the process for establishing the release condition in the release period is added to the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A plurality of sort tables are set, and the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is different according to each sort table. Here, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is not notified to the player. Therefore, the player cannot grasp how long the round game will continue. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the upper limit number of round games, so that the player can be attracted to the game.

  The number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 differs depending on the type of the distribution table. That is, the number of times that the release period occurs differs depending on the type of the distribution table. When a cancellation period occurs, it is necessary to establish a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period, so the number of times that the cancellation period occurs may affect the time required to consume 100R of the round game. high. According to this configuration, the player can be focused not only on the upper limit number of round games but also on the number of times the release period occurs.

  Even if the number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 differs according to the type of the allocation table, the round game set in the round counter RC The upper limit of the number of times is set to be the same halfway. Here, if the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is different for each allocation table, the type of the allocation table selected at an early stage is specified by the player. In that respect, according to the present configuration, since the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC is set to the same halfway, the type of distribution table is specified to the players at an early stage, It is possible to prevent a reduction in the degree of attention to the upper limit number of round games and the number of times the release period occurs.

  When the round counter RC becomes “1” or more after 100R digestion, the high probability mode is set, and when the round counter RC becomes “0” after 100R digestion, the low probability mode is set. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage over the selection of the distribution table with the round counter RC being “1” or more.

  The number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is smaller in the allocation table in which the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. It is easier to select than the distribution table. Here, a distribution table with a smaller number of times of setting the upper limit number of round games in the round counter RC is selected than a distribution table having a higher number of times of setting the upper limit number of round games in the round counter RC. If it is the structure which is easy to be performed, the frequency | count that the process of satisfy | filling the cancellation | release condition for canceling | releasing a cancellation | release period will generate | occur | produce will decrease. In that respect, according to this configuration, since a distribution table with a large number of times the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC is easily selected, a release condition for releasing the release period is established for the player. It is possible to prevent the number of times the process is generated from decreasing.

  In any of the release condition tables 1 to 4, either the first release condition or the second release condition may be selected. Here, for example, when the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the first release condition is always set, and when the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the second release condition is always set. If comprised, the type of the success / failure lottery mode set after the opening / closing execution mode ends will be specified by the player from the type of release condition. In this case, it becomes impossible for the player to be thrilled for a long period of time as to which winning / failing lottery mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In this respect, according to this configuration, either the first release condition or the second release condition may be selected regardless of the type of the lottery mode set after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the type of the lottery mode set after the end of the opening / closing execution mode from the type of release condition. Therefore, the player can be thrilled for a long period of time as to which winning / failing lottery mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Regardless of which winning / failing lottery mode is set, symbols “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” excluding the symbol “7” can be selected. Since the probability that the “7” symbol is selected is 3% when the effect symbol lottery table A is selected, the probability that the “7” symbol is selected is low. Here, in the case where the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed for each success / failure lottery mode is set, the type of the success / failure lottery mode that is set after 100R digestion is specified by the player at an early stage. In that regard, according to this configuration, since any symbol other than the “7” symbol can be selected regardless of which winning / failing lottery mode is set, the type of the winning / losing lottery mode set after 100R digestion is an early stage game. It becomes possible to prevent being specified by a person. This makes it possible for the player to play a round game while expecting that the high probability mode will be set after 100R digestion.

  The effects displayed on the display screen G until the cancellation condition is satisfied in the cancellation period are effects displayed on the display screen G in the normal game times, and the combination of the same symbols is stopped in the cancellation period. Until the next round game starts from the time when it is displayed and the combination of the same symbols in the normal game times is stopped and displayed until the round game starts The effects displayed on the display screen G are set to be the same. This makes it possible for the player to play the release period as if playing a normal game round. Furthermore, according to the said structure, even if it does not alert | report a cancellation | release condition for canceling | releasing the said cancellation | release period, a round game starts by the same symbol combination being stopped and displayed on the display screen G It is possible for the player to specify that the

  The number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release condition is different between the first release condition and the second release condition. Here, as described above, when the high probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the first cancellation condition is easily selected, and when the low probability mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the second cancellation condition is easily selected. Therefore, the operation opening 120 required until the release period is canceled by adopting a configuration in which the winning numbers to the operation openings 120 and 121 serving as the release conditions are different between the first release condition and the second release condition. It is possible to allow the player to predict the type of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends from the number of winnings to 121.

  The first release condition is set to 10 winning holes in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period, and the second release condition is set to 100 winning numbers in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period. Has been. Here, as described above, the jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode is set to 1/10, and the jackpot winning probability in the low probability mode is set to 1/100. If the jackpot winning probability is 1/10, the average number of winnings to the operating ports 120, 121 until winning the jackpot is 10, and if the jackpot winning probability is 1/100, until the jackpot winning The number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 is 100. Therefore, according to the above configuration, the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the first release condition and the operating ports 120 and 121 required for winning the big win in the situation where the high probability mode is set The average number of winnings is set to be the same, and the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the second release condition and the operation required to win a big win in the situation where the low probability mode is set The average number of winnings to the mouths 120 and 121 is set to be the same. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily imagine the type of the success / failure lottery mode that is set after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, based on the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 required until the cancellation period is canceled.

  Until the number of winning holes in the operation ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 during the cancellation period, the effect A having the highest probability of being selected when the winning / failing result is a big win is displayed on the display screen G. Is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first release condition is set to 10 winning prizes to the operating ports 120 and 121, and the second releasing condition is 100 winning prizes to the operating ports 120 and 121. Is set. Therefore, the period until the number of winning prizes to the operating ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 in the release period is the period when the player can get the most. Here, according to the present configuration, there is an effect that can be expected to win the biggest win in the period when the heat is most intense. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's feeling of exaltation and to expect that the first release condition is set.

In both the first release condition and the second release condition, the same effects are displayed on the display screen G until the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period reaches ten.
Here, when the effect displayed on the display screen G when the game ball wins the operation port 120, 121 during the release period is different between the first release condition and the second release condition, Which of the first release condition and the second release condition is set in accordance with the contents of the effect displayed on the display screen G when the game ball wins the operation port 120, 121 during the release period It is specified by the player. In that regard, according to this configuration, the first cancellation condition and the second cancellation condition produce the same effects on the display screen G until the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 reaches 10 in the cancellation period. Is set to Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the type of release condition set from the effect generated on the display screen G at the time of winning the operation ports 120 and 121 during the release period. Become.

  When the cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is the second cancellation condition, the selection probability of each effect is different according to the value of the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. Specifically, the effect A or the effect B is more easily selected as the value of the operation opening prize counter is larger. According to the said structure, while raising the degree of attention to the effect displayed on the display screen G in the cancellation | release period, the effect A or the effect B which is easy to be selected when cancellation conditions are satisfied is displayed on the display screen G It can be expected to be done.

  Each time a transition to the release period occurs, a release condition lottery process for specifying the release condition is performed. Here, assuming that the release condition lottery process is performed only once, the player can be thrilled with the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Can not. Further, with this configuration, when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to this configuration, the cancellation condition lottery process for specifying the cancellation condition is performed every time the shift to the cancellation period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by the type of release condition selected in the release condition lottery process every time a transition to the release period occurs. Furthermore, according to this configuration, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, the release condition in the subsequent release period is not always set as the second release condition. Accordingly, even if the second release condition is selected in the first release condition lottery process, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

<Another example of the second embodiment>
(1) The method of setting the upper limit number of round games to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is not limited to referring to the distribution table. For example, the upper limit number of round games is plural. It is good also as a structure by which the lottery process for determining the upper limit frequency | count of a round game is performed whenever the kind is set and the transfer to a cancellation | release period occurs. Also, in this configuration, when the total number of round games has reached 100, if the upper limit number of round games remains, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the upper limit number of round games remains. If not, the winning / raising lottery mode may be set to the low probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the failure to digest the round game in a situation where the round game can be digested.

  (2) In order to change the winning number to the operation ports 120 and 121 as a release condition every time the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 increases by a specific number in the releasing period in which the second releasing condition is set The lottery process may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the release period in which the second release condition is set, when the number of wins to the operation ports 120 and 121 exceeds 10, the number of wins to the operation ports 120 and 121 increases by 10 In addition, the lottery process may be performed. In the lottery process, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to decrease the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release conditions, compared to the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the currently set release conditions. Is called. Here, when the second release condition is set, if the winning number to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release condition is fixed to 100, the second release condition is set as the release condition. When the player specifies that the player is present, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this respect, according to the present configuration, every time the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 increases by a specific number, a lottery process is performed to change the winning number to the operating ports 120 and 121 as a release condition. . As a result, it is possible to expect that the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release conditions in the lottery process will be reduced. Therefore, when the player specifies that the second release condition is set as the release condition, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player from decreasing.

  (3) Even if a game ball launched before the release period starts and wins the operating ports 120 and 121 during the release period, the game ball is not counted as a game ball won during the release period. Good. Here, if a game ball that was launched before the release period started wins the operating ports 120 and 121 during the release period, the player who did not know that would be counted. Will be disadvantaged. In this regard, according to this configuration, even if a game ball that was launched before the release period started wins the operating ports 120 and 121 during the release period, some game players are not counted because the game balls are not counted. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

  (4) When winning to the operation ports 120 and 121 occurs during the release period, the design is limited to a configuration in which the variable display of the symbols is continuously performed on the display screen G until the release period is released. For example, when a predetermined period has elapsed since winning of the operating ports 120 and 121 occurred during the release period, the symbol display is ended, and the winning of the operating ports 120 and 121 occurs again during the release period. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display of symbols is resumed. Here, in a situation where winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 do not occur for a long time during the release period, if the display of the variation of the symbol is continuously performed on the display screen G, the variation display of the symbol is displayed. Satisfied with what is being done, there is a risk that the launching operation for the purpose of winning a prize at the operation ports 120 and 121 will not be performed. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the predetermined period has elapsed since the winning of the operation ports 120 and 121 has occurred in the release period, the symbol variation display ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the firing operation for the purpose of winning a prize at the operation ports 120 and 121 from being performed for a long period during the release period.

  (5) In the release period, the winning for the upper working port 120 and the winning for the lower working port 121 may be distinguished. In this case, it may be configured such that the winning at the lower working port 121 is preferentially given more than the winning at the upper working port 120. Specifically, for example, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 120 during the release period, the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is incremented by “1”, and the lower operation port 121 is provided during the release period. In the case where a winning is generated, the operation opening winning counter may be incremented by “2”. Here, in the present embodiment, the low frequency support mode is set during the release period. Accordingly, there is a higher probability that a prize for the upper working port 120 will be generated than a prize for the lower working port 121. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a benefit to the occurrence of winning in the lower operating port 121 that is less frequent than the upper operating port 120 in the cancellation period.

  (6) The support mode of the release period is not limited to being set to the low frequency support mode, and either the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode may be set. Specifically, when a transition to the release period occurs, a lottery process for determining the type of support mode for the release period may be performed. When the high frequency support mode is set, the winning frequency to the operation ports 120 and 121 is likely to be higher than when the low frequency support mode is set. According to this configuration, attention can be paid to the type of support mode in the release period, and it can be expected that the high-frequency support mode is set.

  Further, in the above configuration, when the transition to the high probability mode occurs after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode is selected in the lottery process than when the transition to the low probability mode occurs after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which is easy to set. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where transfer to high probability mode occurs after completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode.

  (7) The type of release condition set during the release period of one opening / closing execution mode may be displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, when the first release condition is the first release condition, “first release condition” is displayed on the display screen G after the first release period is released, and the second release condition is In the case of the second release condition, after the second release period is released, “first release condition” and “second release condition” may be displayed on the display screen G. Here, in this embodiment, when the high probability mode is set after 100R digestion, the first cancellation condition is easily selected, and when the low probability mode is set after 100R digestion, the second cancellation condition is easily selected. The player determines the type of the lottery mode set after 100R digestion from the number of times of the first release condition set during the release period of one opening / closing execution mode and the number of second release conditions set during the release period. Predict. Here, when the transition to the release period occurs a plurality of times, the player forgets the number of first release conditions set during the release period and the number of second release conditions set during the release period. There is a possibility. In that respect, according to this configuration, since the type of release condition set during the release period of one opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the display screen G, during the release period of one opening / closing execution mode It becomes possible for the player to surely grasp the number of times of the set release conditions. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the type of the success / failure lottery mode set after 100R digestion from the number of times each release condition is set.

  (8) The notification for aiming to win the operating ports 120 and 121 is not limited to a configuration that ends at the timing when the winning to the operating ports 120 and 121 occurs. Even if it occurs, the notification may be continued. Here, when the notification that aims to win a prize at the operation ports 120 and 121 ends at the timing when the winning at the operation ports 120 and 121 occurs, the release condition for releasing the release period is the action port 120, 121. There is a possibility that the notification may be terminated before the player recognizes that a winning to 121 is generated. In that respect, according to the above-described configuration, the notification continues even if a winning is made to the operation ports 120 and 121, so that the player can surely recognize the release condition.

  In the release period, when the winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 have not occurred for a predetermined period, the notification on the display screen G that aims to win the operating ports 120 and 121 may be resumed. Here, in the case where the winning for the operation ports 120 and 121 has not occurred for a predetermined period in the release period, it is highly likely that the player has stopped performing the firing operation. In this case, the time required until the cancellation period is canceled becomes longer. In that regard, according to this configuration, when the winning for the operating ports 120 and 121 has not occurred for a predetermined period in the release period, the notification for targeting the winning to the operating ports 120 and 121 on the display screen G is made. Will occur. When the notification is generated, the player is likely to feel that a winning for the operation ports 120 and 121 must be generated. Therefore, according to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the time required until the cancellation period is canceled from increasing.

  (9) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a lottery process for specifying a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is performed every time a transition to the cancellation period occurs in one opening / closing execution mode. In one opening / closing execution mode, the release condition specified in the lottery process may be continuously set until the end of the one opening / closing execution mode in the first release period. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the expectation with respect to setting of 1st cancellation | release conditions.

  (10) The number of cancellations of the first cancellation condition is set to 10 and the number of cancellations of the second cancellation condition is set to 100, and the configuration is arbitrary.

  (11) The number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that trigger the generation of each effect displayed on the display screen G during the release period in which the first release condition is set is arbitrary. Further, the second predetermined value, the third predetermined value, and the fourth predetermined value are arbitrary.

  (12) The distribution table is not limited to 10 types and is arbitrary. Further, the upper limit number of round games set in the distribution table is arbitrary, and the value set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 after the round game is 100R digested is arbitrary.

<Third Embodiment>
The cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

<Direction determination processing>
Processing of the sound emission control device 90 in response to a command transmitted from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 according to the third embodiment.

  First, in step S2801, it is determined whether a notification command is received. The notification command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is the timing for notifying the player to perform the launch operation. The notification command is transmitted from the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 at the timing when the shift to the release period occurs. In a situation where one round game is ended and the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is less than 100 , Move to the release period. The said cancellation | release period is a period for making the cancellation | release condition for canceling | releasing the said cancellation | release period for a player to be satisfied. The release condition will be described later in detail.

  Similarly to the second embodiment, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 100 in this embodiment, and any of the distribution tables set in a plurality of types is assigned. With reference to the table, the upper limit number of round games corresponding to the value of the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set in the round counter RC.

  In the distribution table, the upper limit number of round games set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 and the numerical information of the round game counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are 1: 1. And is used when the upper limit number of round games is set in the round counter RC.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command is executed and output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed in step S2802. In subsequent step S2803, the notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 as it is.

  Here, processing of the display control apparatus 100 corresponding to the command transmitted by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the notification command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2901: YES), the display control device 100 transmits information for displaying the notification image to the VDP 105 in step S2902. Thereby, the notification image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the door is displayed on the display screen G, and “Launch a game ball and break the door!” Is displayed. The notification image is displayed on the display screen G until the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period reaches a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player that the game ball is being fired. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls fired in the game area in the release period becomes a predetermined number, so that the release period is released and the next round game is started. The

<Reading process>
Next, the reading process executed in step S1401 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not a winning for the upper working port 120 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 120a corresponding to the upper working port 120.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3002. The counter for three prize balls is for counting the number of times a command for three prize balls should be output for instructing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls.

  In a succeeding step S3003, it is determined whether or not the cancellation period is in progress. As described above, the release period is a period for allowing a player to establish a release condition for releasing the release period. Specifically, whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0” and the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more and less than “100”. Determine whether or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, 1 is added to the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3004. The number-of-fired counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls fired in the game area in the release period by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. In the present embodiment, the release condition for releasing the release period is that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is a predetermined number.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3001, a negative determination is made in step S3003, or if the process in step S3004 is executed, it is determined in step S3005 whether or not a prize for the lower operation port 121 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 121c corresponding to the lower operation port 121.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3005, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3006. In a succeeding step S3007, it is determined whether or not the cancellation period is in progress. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S3003. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3007, 1 is added to the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3008.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3005, a negative determination is made in step S3007, or if the process of step S3008 is executed, it is determined in step S3009 whether or not a prize has been generated for the general winning opening 21. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 21a corresponding to the general winning opening 21.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, 1 is added to the 10 winning ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3010. The 10-award ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10-award ball command that instructs the payout control device 70 to pay out 10 gaming balls should be output.

  In a succeeding step S3011, it is determined whether or not the cancellation period is in progress. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S3003. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, 1 is added to the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3012.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3009, a negative determination is made in step S3011, or if the process in step S3012 is executed, it is determined in step S3013 whether or not a prize for the variable winning device 22 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the HI level signal is received from the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the variable winning device 22.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3013, 1 is added to the counter for four prize balls in step S3014. The 4-prize ball counter is for counting the number of times that a 4-prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 70 to pay out 4 game balls should be output.

  Here, when the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 becomes “0”, the special winning opening 22a is closed. In the situation where the round counter RC is “0”, when the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is less than 100, the process proceeds to the release period. By establishing the release condition during the release period, the special winning opening 22a is opened and the next round game is started. Therefore, the special winning opening 22a is closed during the cancellation period. Therefore, since a winning to the big winning opening 22a does not occur during the canceling period, there is no determination process for determining whether or not the canceling period is in effect when a winning to the variable winning device 22 occurs.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3013, or if the process of step S3014 is executed, it is determined in step S3015 whether or not a ball has entered the out port 27. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an HI level signal is received from a not-shown entrance detection sensor corresponding to the out port 27. The entrance detection sensor outputs an electrical signal to the main controller 140. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting. If a negative determination is made in step S3015, the main reading process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3015, it is determined in step S3016 whether the cancellation period is in progress. The specific processing content is the same as the processing content in step S3003. If a negative determination is made in step S3016, the main reading process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3016, the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is incremented by 1 in step S3017, and the reading process ends.

  According to the present embodiment, the release condition for releasing the release period is that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is a predetermined number. Since the player himself can determine the timing for performing the firing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to adjust the time until the release period is canceled.

<Release condition identification processing>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the cancellation condition-related process executed in step S2020 of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 36) are partially different from those in the second embodiment. First, similarly to the second embodiment, when the first release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, “1” is set to the first release condition flag of the RAM 144. The first release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the first release condition.

  On the other hand, when the second release condition is selected in the release condition lottery process, “1” is set to the second release condition flag in the RAM 144. The second release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the second release condition. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, two types of release conditions for releasing the release period are set as in the second embodiment.

  When “1” is set in any of the above flags, release condition specifying processing is performed. The release condition specifying process is performed to display an effect corresponding to the set release condition on the display screen G and to specify whether or not the set release condition is satisfied. The cancellation condition specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the release condition specifying process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “3”. As described above, the number-of-fired counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area in the release period by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, a first firing number command is set in step S3102. The first firing number command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is three. The first firing number command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the first firing number command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2804: YES), in step S2805, the first light emitting number command is set. The light emission control of the corresponding display lamp unit 54 is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed. In subsequent step S2806, the first firing number command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the first firing number command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2903: YES), information for displaying the first image in step S2904 is displayed as the VDP 105. Send to. Thereby, the first image is displayed on the display screen G. The first image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is an explanatory diagram for describing the first image.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), two cracks are generated on the door that is displayed as “Launch the game ball and break the door!”. By providing an effect in which the door is cracked, it is possible to make the player easily imagine that the door is destroyed. The first image is displayed on the display screen G until the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period reaches six.

  Returning to the description of the release condition specifying process (FIG. 51), when a negative determination is made in step S3101 or when the process of step S3102 is executed, the number of fired counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set in step S3103. It is determined whether or not “6”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, a second number-of-fires command is set in step S3104. The second firing number command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is six. The second emission number command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the second firing number command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2807: YES), it responds to the second firing number command in step S2808. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed. In subsequent step S2809, the second number-of-fired command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the second number-of-fires command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2905: YES), information for displaying the second image in step S2906 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send to. Thereby, the second image is displayed on the display screen G. The second image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is an explanatory diagram for describing the second image.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), a crack larger than the first image is displayed, and the number of cracks displayed is larger than that of the first image. As a result, the greater the number of game balls launched into the game area, the higher the expectation that the door will be destroyed. The second image is displayed on the display screen G until the number of game balls launched in the game area in the release period reaches ten.

  Returning to the description of the release condition specifying process (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S3103, or if the process of step S3104 is executed, the number-of-fired counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are displayed in step S3105. It is determined whether or not “10”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3105, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not “1” is set in the first release condition flag of the RAM 144. If a negative determination is made in step S3106, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, the first release condition flag is a flag for specifying that the release condition for releasing the release period in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is the first release condition. In the present embodiment, when the first release condition is set as the release condition for releasing the release period, the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period becomes 10, so that the release period becomes Canceled. On the other hand, when the second release condition is set as the release condition for releasing the release period, the release period is released when the number of game balls launched in the game area becomes 100 in the release period. . Therefore, by providing the processing of step S3106, when the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period reaches 10, the subsequent processing is made different according to the set release condition flag. Is possible. Processing in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3106 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3105, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “50”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, a third firing number command is set in step S3108. The third firing number command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is 50. The third firing number command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the third firing number command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2810: YES), it responds to the third firing number command in step S2811. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed. In subsequent step S2812, the third firing number command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the third number-of-fires command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2907: YES), information for displaying the third image in step S2908 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send to. As a result, the third image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, an image having more cracks than the second image is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the release condition specifying process (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process of step S3108 is executed, the number-of-fired counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are set in step S3109. It is determined whether or not it is “80”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3109, a fourth firing number command is set in step S3110. The fourth firing number command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the number of game balls launched into the game area during the release period is 80. The fourth firing number command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the sound emission control device 90 has received the fourth firing number command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2813: YES), it responds to the fourth firing number command in step S2814. The light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 and the output control of the speaker unit 55 are executed. In subsequent step S2815, the fourth firing number command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the fourth firing number command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2909: YES), information for displaying the fourth image in step S2910 is displayed in the VDP 105. Send to. As a result, the fourth image is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, an image having more cracks than the third image is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the release condition specifying process (FIG. 51), if a negative determination is made in step S3109, or if the process of step S3110 is executed, the number-of-fires counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set in step S3111. It is determined whether or not “100”. If a negative determination is made in step S3111, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3106 or an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, a release command is set in step S3112. The release command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the release condition is satisfied. The cancellation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the release command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 (step S2816: YES), the sound emission control device 90 of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the release command in step S2817. While performing light emission control, output control of the speaker part 55 is performed. In subsequent step S2818, a release command is transmitted to display control apparatus 100.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the display control device 100 receives the release command from the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 (step S2911: YES), the display control device 100 transmits information for displaying the release image to the VDP 105 in step S2912. As a result, the release image is displayed on the display screen G. The release image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the release image.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (c), the door is destroyed and is not displayed, and “Congratulation!” Is displayed instead.

  According to the present embodiment, even when the number of launches that is a release condition for releasing the release period is 100, the release condition for releasing the release period until the number of shots in the release period reaches 10 An image similar to the case where the number of firings is 10 is displayed. As a result, even if the number of launches that is a release condition for releasing the release period is set to 100, the release period is released when the number of fires in the release period reaches 10. It can be expected.

  Returning to the description of the release condition specifying process (FIG. 51), after executing the process of step S3112, the distribution table read to the RAM 144 in step S3113 is referred to, and the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are stored in step S3114. The number of rounds corresponding to the provided round game counter is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144.

  In the subsequent step S3115, “1500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144, and the firing number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is a period during which the image of FIG. 52C is displayed on the display screen G, and 3 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In step S3116, any release condition flag for which “1” is set is cleared to “0”, and “1” is set to the pre-opening flag in the RAM 144. The pre-opening flag is a flag for specifying that the opening effect has not yet occurred in a situation where the release condition for releasing the release period is satisfied in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. When “1” is set in the pre-opening flag, an opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the opening command to the display control device 100. Thereby, an opening effect is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the character is displayed on the display screen G, and “Round game start!” Is displayed adjacent to the character. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the round game is started after the cancellation period is canceled.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the release condition for releasing the release period is that the number of game balls launched into the game area in the release period is a predetermined number. Since the player himself can determine the timing for performing the firing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to adjust the time until the release period is canceled.

  The effects displayed on the display screen G are set to be the same until the number of game balls launched in the game area in the release period reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the predetermined number is set to 10, and the value of 10 is set as a condition for satisfying the first release condition. Therefore, according to this configuration, regardless of which release condition is set, the release period is canceled when the number of game balls launched in the game area reaches 10 in the release period. It can be expected.

<Another example of the third embodiment>
(1) Not only does the number of game balls fired in the game area during the release period become a predetermined number set in advance, but winnings to the operation ports 120, 121 and the general winning opening 21 occur during the release period. It is good also as a structure by which the lottery process of whether to cancel the said cancellation | release period is performed at a timing. According to this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform the shooting operation while aiming for winning in the operation ports 120 and 121 and the general winning port 21 instead of allowing the player to perform the shooting operation in the release period.

  (2) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the number of launches that is a release condition for releasing the release period is set to 10 or 100, for example, a plurality of launch numbers that are the release conditions are set. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of shots serving as the release condition is determined by performing a lottery process for determining the number of shots serving as the release condition. According to the said structure, it can be made to expect that the number of discharges used as the said cancellation | release conditions will decrease. Further, in the configuration, when the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, it is possible to select a smaller number of fires in the lottery process than when the low probability mode is set. Good. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage that high probability mode is set after completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode.

  (3) A configuration may be adopted in which game balls that exist in the game area before the release period are not counted in the number of shots that is a release condition. Specifically, when the transition to the release period first occurs, the launch operation becomes invalid before the transition to the release period occurs. After the game ball is fired, the winning detection sensors 21a, 120a, 121c corresponding to the various winning ports 21, 120, 121, and the unillustrated ball detecting sensor corresponding to the out port 27 detect the gaming ball. After the longest time required, the transition to the release period occurs and the launch operation becomes effective. According to this configuration, since there is no game ball in the game area when the transition to the release period occurs, the number of game balls launched into the game area during the release period can be specified precisely. .

  (4) A configuration may be adopted in which game balls returned to the guide rail without being released to the game area during the release period are counted as the number of game balls launched during the release period. Here, in spite of performing the launch operation toward the game area, the game ball may not be fired in the game area. In this case, there is a possibility that there is a player who feels frustrated that the game ball is not counted as the number of shots, even though the player has fired the game ball during the release period. is there. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the game balls that have returned to the guide rail without being released to the game area during the release period are counted as the number of game balls that have been launched during the release period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling frustrated with respect to the fact that the game balls launched in the release period are not counted as the number of game balls launched in the release period.

  (5) The effect displayed on the display screen G during the release period is not limited to the effect that the door cracks, for example, the effect displayed on the display screen G in the normal game times The same effect may be generated. Specifically, when the shift to the release period occurs, a plurality of symbol strings are displayed on the display screen G. In this situation, when a winning is made to the operation ports 120 and 121, the symbols are displayed on the display screen G in a variable manner. In the situation where the symbol variation display is performed, the same symbol combination is displayed on the display screen G when the number of shots corresponding to the release condition is reached. Further, in a situation where the symbol variation display is not performed on the display screen G, the same symbol combination is displayed on the display screen G even when the number of fired shots corresponds to the release condition. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make a player play a cancellation | release period as if playing a normal game round.

  (6) In the situation where the second release condition is set as the release condition, if the number of fired shots is greater than 10, an effect different from the effect displayed so far (the effect of cracking the door) is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed on the screen G. Specifically, for example, when the number of shots during the release period exceeds 10, the character may be displayed on the display screen G every time the number of shots increases by a predetermined number. Here, when the second release condition is set, the release period is not released until the number of shots reaches 100, so that the effect displayed on the display screen G until the number of shots reaches 10 If the same effect is displayed after that, the player may get bored with the effect. In that respect, according to the present configuration, in the situation where the second release condition is set as the release condition, if the number of fired shots is greater than 10, an effect different from the effect displayed so far is displayed on the display screen G. Displayed above. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the effect displayed on the display screen G when the second release condition is set as the release condition.

  In the above configuration, when the number of fires during the release period exceeds 10, any one of the effects may be displayed. Specifically, when the number of shots exceeds 10 during the release period, each time the number of shots increases by a predetermined number, a lottery process for determining whether or not to display any one of a plurality of effects The effect selected in the lottery process is displayed on the display screen G. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make a player play a cancellation | release period, paying attention to the kind of effect displayed on the display screen G. FIG.

  (7) When the transition to the release period occurs, a notification to the effect that a game ball is to be fired in the game area on the display screen G (“A game ball is fired on the display screen G and the door is broken. Is not limited to the configuration in which the notification is displayed continuously until the cancellation period is canceled, for example, that a game ball has been fired in the gaming area after the notification has occurred. The notification may not be displayed at the specified timing.

  Moreover, in the said structure, when the game ball is not discharged to the game area over the predetermined period during the cancellation | release period, it is good also as a structure by which the said alert | report is displayed on the display screen G again. Here, if a game ball has not been fired in the game area for a predetermined period, the player may have forgotten that the game ball must be fired in the game area in the release period. In that respect, according to this configuration, when the game ball has not been fired in the game area for a predetermined period during the release period, the notification is resumed on the display screen G. Even if you forget that you have to do it, you can make it correspond.

  (8) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a sensor for detecting a game ball is provided in the out port 27, and a sensor for detecting a game ball is not provided in the out port 27. A sensor for detecting a game ball may be provided in a discharge passage provided below the board 20. In this case, it is assumed that the game balls that have won the various winning ports 21, 120, 121 and the game balls that have entered the out port 27 are guided into the discharge passage.

  (9) It is not limited to the configuration in which the number of fires that trigger the crack displayed on the door displayed on the display screen G is set to 3, 6, 50, and 80, and is arbitrary. Moreover, it is not limited to the structure by which the number of discharges used as the opportunity which a door displayed on the display screen G cracks is set to four, and is arbitrary.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The processing performed during the round game is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

<Normal processing>
A normal process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 in the fourth embodiment.

  First, the processes in steps S3201 to S3203 are the same as those in steps S1601 to S1603.

  When the process of step S3203 is executed, a game state transition process is executed in step S3204. The gaming state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 133 has ended. If a negative determination is made in step S3302, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot flag of the RAM 144. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 has won the jackpot. When the jackpot is won in the determination process, “1” is set to the jackpot flag in the RAM 144. If a negative determination is made in step S3303, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, “16” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3304. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the upper limit number of round games by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. In the present embodiment, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 16 times.

  In subsequent step S3305, "1000" is set as a waiting period for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started. Therefore, the waiting period for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting period is arbitrary.

  In step S3306, an opening command is set. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53).

  When receiving the opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode. In accordance with the set production pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  Next, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the effect setting processing for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, an extension-related process is executed in step S3307. The extension-related process is a process performed to extend the waiting period until the next round game is started or to cancel the extension of the waiting period. When one round game is completed, the next round game is started after the waiting period. In the present embodiment, the player himself / herself can decide whether or not to extend the standby period, or can cancel the extended standby period. Details of the extension-related processing will be described later.

  When the process of step S3307 is executed, a big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S3308. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is open. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. When a negative determination is made in step S3403, the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, it is determined in step S3404 whether "1" is set in the extension flag of the RAM 144. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  The extension flag is a flag for specifying that the waiting period until the next round game is started in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 is being extended. Although details will be described later, when the waiting period is extended, the process of opening the special winning opening 22a is not performed until an operation for canceling the extended waiting period is performed. Therefore, by providing the process of step S3404, in the situation where the standby period is extended, the operation of canceling the extended standby period is not performed, but the special prize opening 22a described later is opened. It is possible to prevent the process for opening from being performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3404, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S3405. In the large winning opening opening process, first, “10” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for specifying the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a which is one end condition of the round game in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  Next, “15000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started (every 2 msec), the value is set in the timer counter. After 30 seconds, the timer counter T becomes “0”. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for the opening time until the variable winning device 22 changes from the open state to the closed state, and 30 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. However, when the launch operation is continuously performed during the opening time, the opening time is arbitrary as long as the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a, which is one end condition of the round game, is reached. is there. Next, an opening execution process is executed, and the main prize winning opening process is terminated. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 22c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 22a is opened.

  After executing the process of step S3405, an opening command is set in step S3406, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the opening command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a, and the output control of the speaker unit 55. To do.

  Thereafter, the sound emission control device 90 transmits an opening command to the display control device 100 in order to make the display control device 100 recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 22a has been started. The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referenced in the data table based on the received release command. Thereby, on the display screen G, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed.

  Here, before explaining the processing of steps S3407 to S3420 of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 55), refer to FIG. 56 for the extension related processing executed in step S3307 of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 54). While explaining. As described above, the extension-related process is a process performed to extend the waiting period until the next round game is started or to cancel the extension of the waiting period. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an extension-related process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the effect button 58 provided on the upper bulging portion 56 has been operated. The effect buttons 58 are operated by the player when the symbols are changed or displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, in step S3501, it is determined whether an HI level signal is received from an effect detection sensor (not shown) corresponding to the effect button 58. When the production detection sensor (not shown) is detected, a HI level signal is output. When the production detection sensor (not shown) is not detected, a LOW level signal is output. If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the extension related processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the special winning opening 22a is being opened. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, it is determined in step S3503 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “2” to “16”. Here, when the round counter RC is “2” to “16”, a round game that is not a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is being played. If it is not a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the next round game is started after a waiting period until the next round game is started.

  On the other hand, in the case of a round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times, the next round game will not be performed after the end of the round game. Therefore, after the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times is ended, the transition to the waiting period Will not occur.

  Therefore, by providing the processing of step S3503, it is possible to prevent the processing that causes the extension of the waiting period described later from being performed when the effect button 58 is operated during the round game corresponding to the upper limit number of times. It becomes possible. If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the extension related processing is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not “1” is set in the extension schedule flag of the RAM 144. The extension schedule flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 extends the waiting period until the next round game is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, an extension scheduled command is set in step S3505. The extension schedule command is a command for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that the waiting period until the next round game is started is to be extended. The extension schedule command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the extension schedule command, it performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the extension schedule command and the output control of the speaker unit 55. Next, the extension schedule command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Thereby, it is displayed on the display screen G that the waiting period until the next round game is started is to be extended. Specifically, “Extension setting complete!” Is displayed at the top of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player that the setting for extending the waiting period has been completed.

  After executing the processing of step S3505, “1” is set to the extension schedule flag of the RAM 144 in step S3506, and this extension-related processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, an extension schedule cancel command is set in step S3507. The extension schedule cancel command is a command for the sound emission control device 90 to specify that the extension of the waiting period until the next round game is started by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 is cancelled. The extension schedule cancellation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53).

  When the voice light emission control device 90 receives the extension schedule cancel command, the voice light emission control device 90 performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the extension schedule cancel command and also performs output control of the speaker unit 55. Next, the extension schedule cancellation command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. As a result, it is not displayed that the waiting period until the next round game is started is to be extended. According to this configuration, even if the standby period is mistakenly operated in a situation where there is no intention of extending the standby period, it is possible to prevent the standby period from being extended.

  After executing the processing in step S3507, the extension schedule flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S3508, and this extension-related processing ends. Details of processing performed when a negative determination is made in step S3502 (processing in steps S3509 to S3510) will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 55), if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, the processes of steps S3407 to S3412 are executed. The processing from Step S3407 to Step S3412 is the same as the processing from Step S2008 to Step S2013.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407 or an affirmative determination is made in step S3410, a closing execution process is executed in step S3411. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c is terminated so that the special winning opening 22a is closed. In step S3412, a close command is set. The close command includes information on whether or not “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 144. The closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the closing command, the sound emission control device 90 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the closing command and the output control of the speaker unit 55. Next, the closing command is transmitted to the display control device 100. As a result, an effect corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G.

  When the process of step S3412 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3413. In subsequent step S3414, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3414, it is determined in step S3415 whether or not “1” is set in the extension schedule flag of the RAM 144. As described above, the extension schedule flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 extends the waiting period until the next round game is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3415, "500" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3416, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for a waiting period until the variable winning device 22 is changed from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again. Is set. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the waiting period until the next round game is started is not extended, the next round game is started after 1 sec.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3415, an extension command is set in step S3417. The extension command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S3201 of the normal process (FIG. 53). When the sound emission control device 90 receives the extension command, the sound emission control device 90 executes the emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the extension command and the output control of the speaker unit 55. Next, the extension command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Thereby, it is displayed on the display screen G that the waiting period until the next round game is started is being extended. Specifically, “Waiting for the standby period” is displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the waiting period is being extended easily.

  After executing the process of step S3417, in step S3418, the extension flag of the RAM 144 is set to “1”, the extension schedule flag of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”, and timers provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are set. “250” is set in the counter T, and the main prize winning opening / closing process ends. As described above, the extension flag is a flag for specifying that the waiting period until the next round game is started in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 is being extended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T in the process of step S3418 is the shortest time required for the variable winning device 22 to change from the open state to the closed state, and 0.5 sec is set in the pachinko machine 10. Yes. When the extension flag of the RAM 144 is set to “1” and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”, the standby period is extended.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable winning device 22 is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “1” or more, and the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 are provided. When the timer counter T is “0”, processing for opening the special winning opening 22a is performed. In this configuration, when the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 at the end of the round game in which the operation for extending the waiting period is performed. When the value set to is smaller than “250”, the timer counter T becomes “0” before the special winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state. In this situation, when the production button 58 is operated immediately after the transition to the extended waiting period occurs, the special winning opening 22a is opened while the special winning opening 22a is switched from the open state to the closed state. May be performed.

  When the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the value set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 at the end of the round game is more than “250”. If it is large, it takes time until the operation for canceling the extended waiting period becomes effective. In this case, it becomes impossible to meet the needs of players who have changed their desire to cancel the extended waiting period as soon as possible.

  According to this embodiment, when the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the variable winning device 22 is opened to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 at the end of the round game. “250” is set as the shortest time required from the state to the closed state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process for opening the special winning opening 22a from being performed while the special winning opening 22a is switched from the open state to the closed state, and to cancel the extended waiting period as soon as possible. It becomes possible to meet the needs of players who have changed to the idea.

  Here, the processing of step S3509 to step S3510 of the extension-related processing (FIG. 56) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 56, if a negative determination is made in step S3502, it is determined in step S3509 whether the waiting period until the next round game is started is being extended. Specifically, it is determined whether “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 144 and whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3509, the extension related process is terminated as it is. The case where a negative determination is made in step S3502 and step S3509 is during the opening period or the ending period.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3509, the extension flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S3510, and this extension-related process ends.

  According to the present embodiment, when the effect button 58 is operated during a round game that does not correspond to the upper limit number of times, the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended. According to this configuration, since the method for extending the standby period is set to a simple method of operating the effect button 58, the standby period can be easily extended. When the standby period is extended, the standby period is canceled by operating the effect button 58. Thereby, it is possible to cancel the standby period extended in accordance with the convenience of the player.

  Next, processing in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S3414 will be described. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3414, the processing in steps S3419 to S3420 is executed, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The processing in steps S3419 to S3420 is the same as the processing in steps S2024 to S2025.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 54), when the process of step S3308 is executed, it is determined in step S3309 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S3309, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3309, it is determined in step S3310 whether or not “0” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. If a negative determination is made in step S3310, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3310, the big hit flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S3311, and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 53), when the process of step S3204 is executed, the process of step S3205 is executed. The processing in step S3205 is the same as the processing in step S1605.

  In subsequent step S3206, it is determined whether or not the waiting period until the next round game is started is being extended. Specifically, it is determined whether “1” is set in the extension flag of the RAM 144 and whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3206, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S3207. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source and launch controller 80 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 51. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 is excited once in a period (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  According to the present embodiment, the launch operation is invalidated in a situation where the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended. Therefore, the game ball is not launched toward the game area during the waiting period. This makes it easy for the player to specify that the waiting period is extended, and prevents the game from being performed during the extended waiting period.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, or when the process of step S3207 is executed, the processes of step S3208 to step S3214 are executed. The processing from Step S3208 to Step S3214 is the same as the processing from Step S1607 to Step S1613.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the effect button 58 is operated during a round game that does not correspond to the upper limit number of times, the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended. According to this configuration, since the method for extending the standby period is set to a simple method of operating the effect button 58, the standby period can be easily extended. When the standby period is extended, the standby period is canceled by operating the effect button 58. Thereby, it is possible to cancel the standby period extended in accordance with the convenience of the player.

  In the situation where the effect button 58 is operated once during one round game, if the effect button 58 is operated once again during the round game, the extension of the waiting period is cancelled. According to this configuration, even if the standby period is mistakenly operated in a situation where there is no intention of extending the standby period, it is possible to prevent the standby period from being extended.

  In a situation where the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the firing operation is invalidated. Therefore, the game ball is not launched toward the game area during the waiting period. This makes it easy for the player to specify that the waiting period is extended, and prevents the game from being performed during the extended waiting period.

<Another example of the fourth embodiment>
(1) A configuration may be employed in which a face authentication device (or fingerprint authentication device) is provided. Specifically, before starting the game, an image for registering a face or fingerprint is displayed on the display screen G, and the player's face or fingerprint is registered. When canceling the extension of the waiting period until the next round game is started, an image for confirming the face or fingerprint is displayed on the display screen G. The player places a face in the area displayed on the display screen G, or places a finger on the fingerprint reading sensor. If the registered face data or fingerprint data is the same, the extension of the waiting period is canceled. Here, when the user leaves the seat with the standby period extended, there is a possibility that the extension of the standby period may be canceled by a player different from the player who extended the standby period. In this regard, according to this configuration, if the face data or fingerprint data registered before the game is started and the face data or fingerprint data acquired before the extended waiting period is not matched, the waiting is performed. The period cannot be canceled. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the waiting period from being canceled by a player different from the player who extended the waiting period. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent trouble from occurring between the player who extended the waiting period and the player who released the waiting period different from the player.

  In this configuration, when the extended standby period reaches a predetermined period, the extension of the standby period is canceled by operating the effect button 58 without performing face authentication or fingerprint authentication. It is good. Here, in the face authentication or fingerprint authentication, if the face data or fingerprint data does not match the face data or fingerprint data stored in the pachinko machine 10, the standby period is extended and the standby period is extended. If the player who has stopped playing the game as it is, the waiting period cannot be canceled. In this case, another player who wants to play the pachinko machine 10 cannot play the pachinko machine 10. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the extended waiting period reaches a predetermined period, the face data or fingerprint data stored in the pachinko machine 10 in the face authentication or fingerprint authentication Even if they do not match, it is possible to cancel the waiting period by operating the effect button 58. According to the said structure, when the player who extended the said waiting period stops a game as it is, it prevents that the player different from the said player cannot play the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to do. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 falls.

  (2) The extension of the waiting period until the next round game is started may be configured only when the special winning opening 22a is in the closed state. Specifically, for example, an extension setting period is provided in the waiting period until the next round game is started, and the extension operation is performed in the extension setting period. Thus, the standby period may be extended. When the big prize opening 22a is open, it is desired to pay attention to the player in the effects displayed on the display screen G during the round game. Here, when the special winning opening 22a is in an open state, if the configuration is such that the extension of the waiting period is performed, the degree of attention to the effect displayed on the display screen G during the round game is reduced. there is a possibility. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the standby period can be extended only when the special winning opening 22a is in the closed state, attention is paid to the effects displayed on the display screen G during the round game. It is possible to prevent the degree from decreasing.

(3) In one opening / closing execution mode, it is good also as a structure by which the upper limit frequency | count which can extend the waiting period until the next round game is started is preset. Here, assuming that the upper limit number of times that the waiting period can be extended is not set in advance, for example, when all of the waiting periods set in one opening / closing execution mode are extended, the opening / closing execution is performed. It takes a long time to complete the mode. In this regard, according to this configuration, in one opening / closing execution mode, since the upper limit number of times that the standby period can be extended is set in advance, the time required to digest one opening / closing execution mode is set. It becomes possible to prevent it from becoming too long.

  (4) In the situation where the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the extended time may be displayed on the display screen G. Here, if the extended time is not displayed on the display screen G, the hall side cannot specify the extended time. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the player who extended the waiting period has stopped the game. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the extended time is displayed on the display screen G, the extended time can be clearly specified on the hall side. Thereby, even if the player who extended the waiting period does not return, it is determined from the extended time displayed on the display screen G that the player has stopped the game. Is possible.

  (5) When the waiting period until the next round game is started is extended, the opening duration of the big winning opening 22a in the round game after the waiting period is released before the waiting period is released It is good also as a structure which becomes shorter than the open continuation time of the big winning opening 22a in the round game performed in (1). Here, when the waiting period is extended and the extended waiting period is canceled, the player is likely to want to quickly digest the round game in order to recover even a little time away from the seat. Therefore, according to this configuration, when the waiting period is extended, the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 22a in the round game after the waiting period is released is performed before the waiting period is released. It becomes shorter than the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 22a in the round game. This makes it possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to quickly digest a round game after extending the waiting period.

  (6) When the transition to the standby period occurs, the standby period may be canceled by operating the effect button 58. Specifically, when one round game is completed, the process proceeds to a waiting period until the next round game is started. By operating the effect button 58 during the standby period, the standby period is canceled and the next round game is started. According to the configuration, since it is not necessary to perform an operation for canceling the standby period during the round game, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the effect displayed on the display screen G during the round game. .

<Fifth Embodiment>
A condition for setting a cancellation condition for canceling a waiting period until the next round game is started is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed in step S1604 of the normal process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140 in the fifth embodiment.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 133 has ended. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, it is determined in step S3603 whether or not a shift to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot flag of the RAM 144. The jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 142 of the main control device 140 has won the jackpot. When the jackpot is won in the determination process, “1” is set to the jackpot flag in the RAM 144. If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, "16" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3604. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the upper limit number of round games by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. In the present embodiment, the total number of round games executed in one opening / closing execution mode is set to 16 times.

  In the subsequent step S3605, "1000" which is the opening time is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The value set in the timer counter T is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started. Therefore, after the timer counter T is set to “1000”, it becomes “0” 2 seconds later.

  In step S3606, an opening command is set. The opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the process of step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When receiving the opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode. In accordance with the set production pattern, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the output control of the speaker unit 55 is executed.

  Next, the sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening / closing execution mode command corresponding to the processing result of the effect setting processing for the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 57), if an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S3607. The special winning opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 22a is open. If a negative determination is made in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined in step S3703 whether or not winning of the special winning opening 22a is detected. The process performed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3703 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3703, it is determined in step S3704 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the special winning opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, it is determined in step S3705 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “16”. The process performed when a negative determination is made in step S3705 will be described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S3706. In the big winning opening process, first, “10” is set as the upper limit number which is one end condition of the round game in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for specifying the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a which is one end condition of the round game in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  Next, “15000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144 b of the RAM 144. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 30 sec after the timer counter T is set to “15000”.

  Next, a release execution process is executed. In the opening execution process, the variable winning driving unit 22c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 22a is opened.

  After the big winning opening opening process is executed in step S3706, after the opening command is set in step S3707, the big winning opening opening / closing process is ended. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 in the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives an opening command from the MPU 142 of the main control device 140, the sound emission control device 90 first executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a and the output control of the speaker unit 55. Execute.

  Next, an opening command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make the display control apparatus 100 recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 22a is started. The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 switches the range of pointer information to be referenced in the data table based on the received release command. Thereby, on the display screen G, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 22a is displayed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the processing of step S3708 to step S3713 is executed. The processing from Step S3708 to Step S3713 is the same as the processing from Step S2008 to Step S2013.

  When the process of step S3713 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3714. In a succeeding step S3715, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. The process performed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3715 will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3715, “1000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3716, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. Since the value set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) is activated, 2 sec after the timer counter T is set to “1000”. “0”. The value of 2 sec is detected by the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the special winning opening 22a in the situation where the special winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state. It is a period that is longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for the process. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the release condition for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started depends on the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a in the round game executed this time. It is different. Here, when the big winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state, a game ball that is not detected by the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the big winning opening 22a exists in the big winning opening 22a. If the game ball is not counted as the number of winnings in the big winning opening 22a in the current round game, the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a in one round game cannot be accurately specified. In this case, it becomes impossible to accurately set the cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started. In this regard, according to the present configuration, in a situation where the big prize opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state, the game balls existing in the big prize opening 22a are detected by the prize detection sensor 22d corresponding to the big prize opening 22a. Since it is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed as a period required until it is detected, it is possible to accurately specify the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a in one round game. As a result, it is possible to accurately set a cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started.

  However, in the situation where the special winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state, a period required for the game ball existing in the special winning opening 22a to be detected by the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the special winning opening 22a. It is good also as a structure longer than 2 sec.

  Next, processing performed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3703 will be described. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, it is determined in step S3717 whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3717, 1 is subtracted from the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3718. When the process of step S3718 is executed, the processes after step S3704 described above are executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3717, it is determined in step S3719 whether or not “1” is set in the excessive winning flag in the RAM 144. The excessive winning flag is a flag for specifying that the number of winning in the large winning opening 22a in one round game exceeds the upper limit in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3719, the processing from step S3704 described above is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3719, “1” is set to the excessive winning flag in the RAM 144 in step S3720. When the process of step S3720 is executed, the processes after step S3704 described above are executed.

  Next, processing performed when a negative determination is made in step S3705 will be described. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, it is determined in step S3721 whether or not “1” is set in the informed flag of the RAM 144. The informed flag is a flag for specifying whether or not a cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started is notified in the MPU 142 of the main control device 140.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3721, a corresponding notification command is set in step S3722. The notification command includes numerical information of the winning upper limit counter PC and information on whether or not “1” is set in the excessive winning flag of the RAM 144. The notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1601 of the normal process (FIG. 31).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the notification command, the sound emission control device 90 first performs light emission control of the display lamp unit 54 corresponding to the notification command and also performs output control of the speaker unit 55. Next, the notification command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  When the display control device 100 receives the notification command, the display control device 100 grasps the value of the winning upper limit counter PC included in the notification command and information on whether or not the excessive winning flag in the RAM 144 is set to “1”. To do. Then, information for displaying a notification image corresponding to whether or not “1” is set to the value of the winning upper limit counter PC and the excessive winning flag of the RAM 144 is transmitted to the VDP 105. As a result, the release condition corresponding to the number of game balls won in the special winning opening 22a is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, for example, the message “Let 5 game balls win in the operation ports 120 and 121!” Is displayed. The notification image is displayed until the standby period is canceled.

  According to the present embodiment, the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 set as a cancellation condition for canceling the standby period is displayed on the display screen G. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the player of the release condition easily.

  After executing the process of step S3722, “1” is set to the informed flag of the RAM 144 in step S3723. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3721, or when the process of step S3723 is executed, a release condition specifying process is executed in step S3724, and the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated. The cancellation condition specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The release condition specifying process is a process for specifying whether or not a release condition for releasing a waiting period until the next round game is started is satisfied. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the release condition specifying process executed by the MPU 142 of the main control device 140.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the excessive winning flag of the RAM 144. As described above, the excessive winning flag is a flag for specifying that the number of winning in the large winning opening 22a in one round game exceeds the upper limit in the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “5”. The operating opening winning number counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls that have won the operating openings 120 and 121 during the waiting period until the next round game is started by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. is there. If a negative determination is made in step S3802, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the read process executed in step S1401 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 29) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140.

  When a winning is made to the upper working port 120 (step S3901: YES), when 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3902, the next round is performed in step S3903. It is determined whether or not a waiting period until the game is started. Specifically, the special winning opening 22a is closed, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is "1" to "15", and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is set. Is determined to be “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, "1" is added to the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3904. As described above, the operation opening winning counter is the number of game balls won in the operation openings 120 and 121 during the waiting period until the next round game is started by the MPU 142 of the main controller 140. It is a counter for doing.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3903, the processing after step S3905 is executed. By providing the processing of step S3903, the number of game balls won to the upper operation port 120 in a situation not during the standby period is counted as the number of game balls won to the upper operation port 120 during the standby period. It becomes possible to stop.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3901, a negative determination is made in step S3903, or if the processing in step S3904 is executed, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not a prize for the lower operation port 121 has occurred.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, one is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3906, and it is determined in the next step S3907 whether or not it is in a waiting period. . The specific processing content of step S3907 is the same as the processing of step S3903.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, “1” is added to the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 in step S3908. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3907, the processing from step S3909 is executed. By providing the processing of step S3907, the number of game balls won to the lower operation port 121 in a situation not during the standby period is counted as the number of game balls won to the lower operation port 121 during the standby period. It becomes possible to stop.

  It should be noted that since the winning to the upper working port 120 and the winning to the lower working port 121 can occur simultaneously within the range of one reading process, the above-mentioned working port winning number counter is incremented by 1 during the standby period. It is possible that the processing to be performed is performed twice.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3905, a negative determination is made in step S3907, or if the process in step S3908 is executed, the processes in steps S3909 to S3912 are executed, and the reading process ends. The processing from Step S3909 to Step S3912 is the same as the processing from Step S1509 to Step S1512. However, in the present embodiment, when a winning to the variable winning device 22 occurs, “1” is added to 15 counters for prize balls provided in various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144.

  Returning to the description of the cancellation condition specifying process (FIG. 59), if a negative determination is made in step S3801, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “0” to “1” in step S3803. It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3803, it is determined in step S3804 whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “10”. If a negative determination is made in step S3804, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3803, it is determined in step S3805 whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “2” to “4”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined in step S3806 whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “15”. If a negative determination is made in step S3906, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined in step S3807 whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “5” to “7”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3807, it is determined in step S3808 whether or not the operating opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “20”. If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3807, it is determined in step S3809 whether or not the operation opening prize counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is “25”. If a negative determination is made in step S3809, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  According to the present embodiment, depending on the number of winnings at the big winning opening 22a during the round game, to the operation ports 120 and 121, which are release conditions for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started. The number of winnings is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S3802, an affirmative decision is made in step S3804, an affirmative decision is made in step S3806, an affirmative decision is made in step S3808, or an affirmative decision is made in step S3809, step S3810 to step The process of S3811 is executed. The processing in steps S3810 to S3811 is the same as the processing in steps S3706 to S3707.

  When the process of step S3811 is executed, the operation port winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S3812, and “1” is set to the excessive winning flag of the RAM 144 in the subsequent step S3813. It is determined whether it is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3813, the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3813, the excessive winning flag in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0” in step S3814, and the cancellation condition specifying process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 58), the process performed when an affirmative determination is made in step S3715. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3715, the processing of step S3725 to step S3726 is executed, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The processing in steps S3725 to S3726 is the same as the processing in steps S2024 to S2025.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, depending on the number of winnings at the big winning opening 22a during the round game, to the operation ports 120 and 121, which are release conditions for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started. The number of winnings is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a.

  2 sec is set as a period from the end of one round game to the transition to the standby period. The value of 2 sec is detected by the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the special winning opening 22a in the situation where the special winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state. It is a period that is longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for the process. Here, when the big winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state, a game ball that is not detected by the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the big winning opening 22a exists in the big winning opening 22a. If the game ball is not counted as the number of winnings in the big winning opening 22a in the current round game, the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a in one round game cannot be accurately specified. In this case, it becomes impossible to accurately set the cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started. In this regard, according to the present configuration, in a situation where the big winning opening 22a is changed from the open state to the closed state, the game ball existing in the big winning opening 22a is applied to the winning detection sensor 22d corresponding to the big winning opening 22a. Since it is set as a period longer than the longest period assumed as a period required until it is detected, it is possible to accurately specify the number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a in one round game. As a result, it is possible to accurately set a cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started.

  On the display screen G, the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 set as a cancellation condition for canceling the standby period is displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the player of the release condition easily.

<Another example of the fifth embodiment>
(1) The cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started is not limited to being set to the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 in the waiting period. . For example, the release condition may be set to the number of shots.

  (2) A configuration in which as the number of winning prizes at the big winning opening 22a increases, the number of winning prizes at the operation ports 120 and 121, which is a release condition for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started, decreases. It is not limited to. For example, a lottery table is provided in accordance with the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 22a during one round game, and the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as release conditions for releasing the waiting period with reference to the lottery table are provided. Alternatively, the number of winning prizes may be determined. In the lottery table, the numerical range of the lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64 and the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121, which are release conditions for releasing the waiting period, are in a one-to-one relationship. It is set correspondingly. The lottery counter is a loop counter that loops through “0 to 99”. Regardless of which lottery table is selected, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of winning prizes to all the operating ports 120 and 121 that are set can be selected. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release conditions for releasing the waiting period will be reduced even if the number of winnings to the big winning port 22a is small. Become.

  A lottery table is provided in accordance with the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 22a during one round game, and the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as release conditions for releasing the waiting period with reference to the lottery table are provided. In the configuration for determining the number of winnings, a lottery table may be read in which, as the number of winnings in the large winning opening 22a increases, the release condition with a smaller number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 is easily selected. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a has increased.

  A lottery table is provided in accordance with the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 22a during one round game, and the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as release conditions for releasing the waiting period with reference to the lottery table are provided. In the configuration for determining the number of winnings, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release conditions is not displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, the player cannot specify the number of winnings in the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the release conditions until the standby period is released. This makes it possible for the player to release the waiting period while being excited by the set release condition.

  (3) The next round game is started not only according to the number of winning prizes at the winning prize opening 22a, but also according to the number of winning prizes at the winning prize opening 22a and winning prizes at the winning openings 21, 120, 121 during the round game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the time is determined. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect not only the winning to the big winning opening 22a during the round game but also the winning to the winning openings 21, 120, 121.

  (4) In order to determine the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121, which are cancellation conditions for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started each time a winning is made to the big winning port 22a. The lottery may be performed. Specifically, when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 22a, a lottery is performed to determine the number of winning prizes to the operation holes 120 and 121 that are the release conditions, and the operation holes that are the release conditions in the lottery. When the number of winnings to 120, 121 is selected, the information is stored in the RAM 144. In this configuration, the prize winning to the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as the release condition selected in the lottery newly performed is more than the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as the release condition stored in the RAM 144. In the case where the number is smaller, the RAM 144 may be configured to store information on the smaller number of winning prizes. At the timing when the waiting period is canceled, the information on the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 that are the cancellation conditions stored in the RAM 144 is cleared to “0”. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 serving as a release condition is reduced every time a winning is made to the big winning port 22a.

  (5) When the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 22a in the current round game is larger than the previous round game, the number of winning prizes in the operation ports 120 and 121, which is a release condition for releasing the previous waiting period Instead, the number of winning prizes to the operation ports 120 and 121, which is a cancellation condition for canceling the current waiting period, may be reduced. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many winning prizes to the big winning opening 22a rather than the last round game.

  (6) Configuration in which the release condition for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started differs depending on the total number of game balls that have won the big winning opening 22a until the round game is started. It is good. Specifically, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the total number of winnings at the special winning opening 22a and the number of winnings at the operation ports 120 and 121, which are release conditions for releasing the waiting period. When the shift occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of winnings to the operation ports 120 and 121 corresponding to the total number of winnings to the big winning port 22a is set. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree with respect to whether the winning to the big winning opening 120,121 generate | occur | produces in each round game.

  (7) Cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period until the next round game is started, as the number of game balls won in excess of the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 22a in one round game is larger It is good also as a structure from which it becomes easy to be materialized. Specifically, for example, when the number of game balls won in excess is 1, the release condition for canceling the waiting period is “5” for the operation slot winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64. When the number of game balls that have been won excessively is two, the release condition for releasing the waiting period is set to “4” as the action slot winning number counter, and the game that has won excessively When the number of balls is three or more, the release condition for canceling the waiting period may be configured such that the operation port winning number counter is set to “3”. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many game balls in which the winning to the big winning opening 22a occurred.

  (8) A configuration in which the number of winnings remaining until reaching the number of winnings in the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the release condition is displayed every time a winning in the operating ports 120 and 121 occurs in the standby period. Also good. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that “one remaining until release” is displayed on the display screen G. According to this configuration, the player does not have to count the number of game balls won in the operation ports 120 and 121 during the standby period. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced.

  When the transition to the waiting period occurs, only the fact that the winning to the operating ports 120 and 121 is generated is displayed, and the number of winnings to the operating ports 120 and 121 set as the cancellation condition for canceling the waiting period is displayed. May not be displayed. Specifically, for example, the display screen G may be configured to display only “Generate a winning for the operation ports 120 and 121!”. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the standby period is canceled each time the winning number for the operation ports 120 and 121 set as the cancellation conditions is reached.

  In the said structure, when winning to the action | operation opening 120,121 generate | occur | produces during a standby | waiting period, it is good also as a structure which a certain effect produces | generates on the display screen G. Specifically, for example, when a winning to the operation ports 120 and 121 occurs during the standby period, the character is displayed on the display screen G, and when the release condition is satisfied, all of the characters are displayed on the display screen G. The character may be displayed. According to this configuration, since the player can be attracted to the effect displayed on the display screen G during the standby period, the standby period can be canceled while the player is entertained.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. Good. Moreover, you may apply the structure described as another form of predetermined embodiment among said each embodiment with respect to embodiment different from the said predetermined embodiment.

  (1) The release condition for releasing the waiting period until the next round game is started is that hold information corresponding to the release condition has been acquired, or the hold corresponding to the release condition in the waiting period It is good also as a structure set to acquire information. Here, the player cannot acquire the hold information corresponding to the release condition for releasing the waiting period, or cannot specify the timing when the hold information is acquired. Therefore, the player can be thrilled at the timing when the release condition for releasing the waiting period is satisfied.

  The said structure WHEREIN: It is good also as a structure by which the content of the hold information used as the said cancellation | release conditions is set to the hold information corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of reach. Here, when a reach display occurs on the display screen G, the player expects to win a big hit. Therefore, according to the configuration, not only the player is thrilled at the timing when the release condition for releasing the waiting period is satisfied, but the hold information corresponding to the release condition corresponds to the big win. Can also be expected.

  (2) There are 16R jackpot results and 100R jackpot results as types of jackpot results, and the game content in the opening / closing execution mode may be different depending on the types of jackpot results. Specifically, in the case of a 16R jackpot result, a round game with 16R as the upper limit number of times is performed. In this case, when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, “16” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. On the other hand, in the case of 100R jackpot result, the round game upper limit number is set so that the round game is not performed with the upper limit number of times 100R but the total number of round game executions is 100 times. Specifically, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, “100” is not set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144, but “1” or more is set in the round counter RC. Numerical information less than “100” is set. When the total number of round games is 100, the open / close execution mode is terminated. Further, every time 1R is consumed, 1 is added to the value of the round game counter provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144. The MPU 142 of the main control device 140 determines whether or not the total number of round games executed has reached 100 by determining whether or not the round game counter has reached “100”. The round game counter is cleared to “0” after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  In the above-described configuration, a lottery process for determining the upper limit number of round games to be set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 144b of the RAM 144 may be performed at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In this configuration, a plurality of types of upper limit numbers of round games are set. However, 100R is not set as the upper limit number of round games. When the upper limit number of round games is specified in the lottery process, the number of rounds is set in the round counter RC. In the situation where the round counter RC is “0”, when the total number of round games executed has not reached 100 times, the transition to the release period occurs. The cancellation period is canceled when a cancellation condition for canceling the cancellation period is satisfied. When the release period is canceled, a lottery process for determining the upper limit number of round games is performed again, and the upper limit number of round games specified in the lottery process is set in the round counter RC. When the total number of round games executed reaches 100, the open / close execution mode ends.

  There are 16R jackpot results and 100R jackpot results as types of jackpot results, and the game contents in the open / close execution mode differ depending on the type of jackpot results, so that the player can enter the release period. It is possible to entertain both the opening / closing execution mode in which the transition does not occur and the opening / closing execution mode in which the transition to the release period occurs.

  (3) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 60 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound emission control device 90 based on a command output from the main control device 60 The apparatus 100 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 90. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

  (4) The device for performing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (5) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric game object is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is impossible for a player to replenish game balls to a pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed in a situation where the number of available game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when a game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a winning ball is generated due to a winning at the upper operating port 120, the lower operating port 121, or the big winning port 22a, the number of usable game balls increases in the data.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 22) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1004 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second and third embodiments, the main The function of executing the processing of step S1906 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the processing of step S3304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S3604),
In the specific gaming state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the closed state and is a predetermined gaming state (round) Predetermined generation means for generating a game (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the second and third embodiments, the function of step S2006 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; A function for executing the process, a function for executing the process of step S3405 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3706 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state (steps S1006 to S1009, steps S1019 to S1022 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function for executing the processing of steps S1313 to S1318, a function for executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2019 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments, and a main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S3414 to S3416 in the MPU 62 of the present invention, a function of executing the processes of steps S3715 and S3716 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth embodiment),
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined end condition different from the passage of the period is satisfied in the standby section (in the first embodiment, the step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) A function for executing the processing of S1009 to S1018, a function for executing the first release condition specifying process and the second release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, and a main function in the third embodiment The function of executing the release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the process of step S3510 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment Function to execute the release condition identification process),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the waiting section before the predetermined gaming state is started in the specific gaming state is ended when a predetermined ending condition different from the passage of the period is satisfied. As a result, a condition that is different from the lapse of the period is satisfied, so that it is possible to cause a situation in which the waiting section ends and the predetermined gaming state starts, and the configuration relating to the specific gaming state may be made novel. It becomes possible.

  Feature A2. The waiting section includes an intermediate waiting section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state of the next execution time after the predetermined gaming state of a predetermined execution time is completed in one specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, characterized by:

  According to the feature A2, when a predetermined gaming state occurs a plurality of times in one specific gaming state, a condition that the mid-waiting section that occurs between the plurality of predetermined gaming states is different from the passage of the period It ends when it is established. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the structure regarding a specific game state novel.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein there are a plurality of predetermined termination conditions so that relative advantages are different.

  According to the feature A3, since there are a plurality of types of predetermined end conditions for ending the waiting section so that relative advantages are different, the player selects a predetermined end condition having a high advantage. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The waiting end means is
First standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in the standby section (in the first embodiment, step S1303 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) In the second and third embodiments, the function of executing step S2004 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, and the process of step S3403 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment. A function to be executed, a function to execute the process of step S3704 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth embodiment), and
Second standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state when the predetermined end condition is satisfied in the standby section (steps S1009 to S1009 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) The function of executing the process of S1018, the function of executing the first release condition specifying process and the second release condition specifying process of the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, the main controller 60 in the third embodiment The function for executing the release condition specifying process in the MPU 62, the function for executing the process of step S3510 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the release condition specifying in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment Processing function), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising:

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to generate a situation in which the standby section ends when the predetermined period elapses and a situation in which the standby section ends when a predetermined end condition different from the period elapses. It is possible to diversify the situation where the waiting section ends.

  Feature A5.1 In one specific gaming state, a situation in which the waiting section is ended by the first waiting end means and a situation in which the waiting section is ended by the second waiting end means occur. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the gaming machine is obtained.

  According to the feature A5, even if it is within the range of one specific gaming state, the standby section ends when a predetermined period elapses, and when the predetermined end condition different from the elapsed period is satisfied, the standby section It is possible to create a situation in which the specific gaming state is progressing.

Feature A6. It has a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a game ball being launched toward the gaming area.

  According to the feature A6, in order to end the standby section, it is necessary to launch a game ball toward the game area. Therefore, it is possible to actively participate in the game even in the standby section.

Feature A7. The transition condition to the specific game state is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The feature A6 is characterized in that the probability that the predetermined end condition per unit number of game balls is satisfied is different from the probability that the condition for transition to the specific game state per unit number of game balls is satisfied. Game machines.

  According to the feature A7, in a configuration in which a game ball needs to be launched toward the game area regardless of which of the predetermined end condition and the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the predetermined number per unit game ball The probability that the end condition is satisfied is different from the probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit number of game balls is satisfied, so that the transition frequency to the specific gaming state and the end frequency of the waiting section are appropriately set. Can be made.

Feature A8. Predetermined ball entry means (game through through gate 24 in the first embodiment, upper operation port 120 and lower operation port 121 in the second embodiment) capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
The gaming machine according to A6 or A7, wherein the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A8, in order to end the waiting section, it is necessary to put the game ball into the predetermined pitching means, so that even in the waiting section, the player pays attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball in the gaming area. It becomes possible.

Feature A9. A specific entry means (a special-purpose through-gate 23) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
The game machine according to Feature A8, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific game state based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to make the entrance means that should aim at entering the ball in order to shift to the specific gaming state and the entrance means that should aim at entering the ball to end the waiting section. Thereby, it is possible to make different the ball entry means that the player pays attention to in each situation, while making the ball entry means to be aimed at in order to generate each situation clear to the player.

  Feature A10. The probability that the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the probability of being different is different.

  According to the feature A10, the probability that the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means, and the transition condition to the specific game state based on the game ball having entered the specific ball entry means. Since the probability of establishing is different, the transition frequency to the specific gaming state and the end frequency of the standby section can be made appropriate.

  Feature A11. In the feature A9 or A10, the predetermined entry means and the specific entry means are provided at a position where the entry of the game ball can be aimed by the same launch operation mode in the game area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A11, since it is sufficient to use the same launching operation mode regardless of which of the predetermined entrance unit and the specific entrance unit is aimed, the launch operation mode is not complicated. It is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to aim at both the establishment of the condition for transitioning to the specific gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined end condition.

Feature A12. One of the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball in the game area with respect to the other,
At least the entrance means provided on the upstream side is a configuration in which the entered game ball continues to flow down the game area,
A game ball that has entered the entrance means provided on the upstream side can enter the entrance means provided on the downstream side of the predetermined entrance means and the specific entrance means. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, which is characterized.

  According to the feature A12, it is possible to realize the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means with one game ball. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the establishment of the condition for transitioning to the specific gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined termination condition at the same time.

Feature A13. The standby end means determines whether to end the standby section based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entrance means (steps S702 to S702 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). A function of executing the processing of S705)
The specific transition means determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means (steps S302 and S302 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). A function of executing the process of S303),
This game machine
First notification control means for controlling the first notification means (second display unit 34) so as to end the first operation in a notification state corresponding to the determination result of the standby end determination means after starting the first operation. (Function for executing the processing of step S205 to step S210 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
After starting the second operation, a second notification control unit that controls the second notification unit (first display unit 33) to end the second operation in a notification state corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination unit. A function of executing the processing of step S505 to step S509 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A12, wherein the first operation and the second operation can be executed at least partially overlapping each other.

  According to the feature A13, the first action and the second action can be executed at least partially overlapping each other, so that the transition to the specific gaming state has occurred and the end condition of the waiting section is satisfied. It is possible to generate the situation that occurs early.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific gaming state based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entering unit.

  According to the feature A14, since the game ball may be entered into the predetermined entry means in both cases where the transition condition to the specific game state is established and when the predetermined end condition is established, each condition is established. Therefore, it is possible to make the game content for the player easy to understand.

  Feature A15. Conditions for satisfying the predetermined end condition based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and conditions for transitioning to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein a condition for satisfying is different.

  According to feature A15, each condition is satisfied in a configuration in which a game ball may be entered into the predetermined entry means in both cases where the transition condition to the specific game state is established and when the predetermined end condition is established. By making the conditions for making them different, it is possible to make the game contents for satisfying each condition easy to understand for the player while preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Feature A16. The predetermined end condition is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area in the standby section, and a game ball is launched toward the game area in a situation different from the standby section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A15, which is not established.

  According to the feature A16, in order to end the standby section, it is necessary to fire a game ball toward the game area in the standby section. Thereby, it becomes possible to positively perform the launch operation in the standby section.

Feature A17. The waiting end means is
Information on the number of times of execution of the predetermined game state that can be executed without causing the standby section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied in the specific game state at the time of the end is stored as a number storage means (the second round counter in the first embodiment). RC2, storage execution means for storing in the round counter RC in the second and third embodiments (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the round number specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second embodiment, A function of executing the processing of step S1906, step S2310 and step S2520 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a function of executing the processing of step S3114 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment),
When the information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means in the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is generated without causing the waiting section that requires the predetermined termination condition to be satisfied at the end. Means for executing the processing of steps S1303 and S1315 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment, and in steps S2004 and S2018 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments. Processing function), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, comprising:

  According to feature A17, when the information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means, the predetermined game state is executed without causing a standby section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied at the end. . As a result, the player expects information corresponding to a large number of executions to be stored in the number storage means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A18. The storage execution means stores information on the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state that can be executed without causing the standby section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied when the storage trigger occurs. The game machine according to feature A17, characterized in that information on the determined number of executions is stored in the number storage means.

  According to the feature A18, since there are a plurality of types of information on the number of executions to be stored in the number storage means when a storage trigger occurs, there is a waiting section that requires a predetermined end condition to be satisfied at the end. It is possible to diversify the number of times the predetermined gaming state is executed without being pinched.

  Feature A19. Profit granting means (in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that gives a predetermined profit when one specific gaming state ends in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of one or more is stored in the number storage means A gaming machine according to Feature A17 or A18, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of Steps S2701 to S2703.

  According to the feature A19, a predetermined profit is given when one specific gaming state ends in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution counts is stored in the number storage means, so that the player is predetermined Attention will be paid not only to the number of executions of the gaming state but also whether or not the situation occurs.

  Feature A20. The profit granting means has one or more executions in the number-of-times storage means rather than a case where one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution numbers is not stored in the number-of-times storage means. The feature A19 is characterized in that the next specific game state is more likely to occur when one specific game state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of times is stored. Game machines.

  According to the feature A20, the next specific game state is likely to occur when one specific game state is ended in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means. When this situation occurs, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined gaming state.

  Feature A21. When one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, it corresponds to one or more execution times stored in the number storage means. A gaming machine according to the feature A19 or A20, characterized by comprising erasing means for erasing information (a function of executing the processing of step S1914 and step S1915 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60).

  According to the feature A21, a predetermined profit is given when one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, while this execution number The information corresponding to is deleted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having an extremely high degree of advantage over the occurrence of the situation.

  Feature A22. In a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, and when one specific gaming state is completed, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the information stored in the number storage means The gaming machine according to any one of features A17 to A21, characterized in that the digestion of is generated in the new specific gaming state.

  According to the feature A22, even if one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, the information corresponding to the number of executions is the next specific game. Takes over to the state. Thus, in the specific game state, the player expects information corresponding to a larger number of executions to be stored in the number storage means regardless of the progress of the specific game state.

Feature A23. It has a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
The predetermined termination condition is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The transition condition to the specific game state is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to Feature A22, wherein a probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit number of game balls is satisfied is higher than a probability that the predetermined end condition per unit number of game balls is satisfied.

  According to the feature A23, since the probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit game ball number is satisfied is higher than the probability that the predetermined end condition per unit game ball is satisfied, one or more in the number storage means Even if one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions is stored, the specific gaming state can be restarted early.

Feature A24. Opening control means (step S1015 to step S1015 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment) that the opening effect is executed before the transition to the specific gaming state and the first predetermined gaming state is started. S1016 and a function of executing steps S1020 to S1022, a function of executing the processes of steps S2021 to S2023 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second and third embodiments)
The waiting section includes an intermediate waiting section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state of the next execution time after the predetermined gaming state of a predetermined execution time is completed in one specific gaming state,
In the feature A22 or A23, the opening control means is configured to execute the opening effect even when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the predetermined gaming state is started in the midway waiting section. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A24, the predetermined game state is started either when the specific game state is newly started and the predetermined game state is started or when the predetermined standby state is ended and the predetermined game state is started. The opening effect is executed before the start of the event. Thereby, even if the predetermined gaming state is started in any of these situations, it is possible to make the player think that the predetermined gaming state has started in the same manner.

  Feature A25. The opening control means generates a new specific game state when one specific game state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature A24, wherein the opening effect is not executed when the predetermined gaming state is started based on the information stored in the number storage means.

  According to the feature A25, when one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of one or more is stored in the number storage means, a predetermined gaming state is generated by generating the next specific gaming state. When the game is started, the opening effect is not executed, which may cause the player to think that a series of specific game states has occurred even though a new specific game state has actually started. It becomes possible.

  Feature A26. Any one of the features A17 to A25, wherein the storage execution unit stores the information on the number of executions in the number storage unit when a storage trigger occurs even in a situation different from the standby section. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to feature A26, since the information on the number of executions may be stored in the number-of-times storage unit even in a situation different from the standby section, a situation in which the information on the number of executions is stored in the number-of-times storage unit is generated. It becomes easy.

Feature A27. Number-of-times grasping means for grasping the number of times that a predetermined event has occurred based on the fact that a game ball has been launched toward the game area as number information (in the second embodiment, the processing in steps S1504 and S1508 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) In the third embodiment, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 has the function of executing the processing of step S3004, step S3008, step S3012 and step S3017).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A26, wherein the predetermined termination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number-of-times information has reached termination criterion information.

  According to feature A27, the predetermined end condition is satisfied when the number of times that the predetermined event has occurred based on the fact that the game ball has been launched in the game area reaches the number corresponding to the end reference information. Will continue to fire the game ball and will focus on the number of occurrences of the predetermined event. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the standby section.

Feature A28. Predetermined entrance means (upper operating port 120 and lower operating port 121) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The gaming machine according to Feature A27, wherein the predetermined event is a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A28, the predetermined end condition is established when the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance means in the standby section becomes the number corresponding to the end reference information. Note that whether or not a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means.

  Feature A29. The gaming machine according to Feature A28, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific gaming state based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry unit.

  According to feature A29, the game ball may be entered into the predetermined entry means in both cases where the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the game content for the player easy to understand.

Feature A30. The specific transition means determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (the process of step S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). Function to execute)
This game machine
A pattern display means (pattern display device 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
The pattern display control means (step S1801 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls the picture display means to display the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the change display of the picture is started. To the function of executing the process of step S1806),
With
The design display control means is a standby control means for controlling the design display means so that the display of the change of the design is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entry means in the standby section. The gaming machine according to Feature A29, further comprising a function of executing a first release period handling process in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  According to the feature A30, since the pattern display is performed by the pattern display unit even in the standby section, the situation that is not the specific gaming state and the situation that is the standby section are made to be recognized as the same situation. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opportunity to start the predetermined game state while keeping the game content of the player until the predetermined game state is generated.

Feature A31. The pattern display control means includes normal control means for changing the execution mode of the variation display of the pattern as time passes when the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination unit is performed. ,
The waiting control means, when causing the predetermined ball entering means to display the variation of the pattern based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the standby section, the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means. Based on the above, means for changing the execution mode of the variation display of the pattern (function to execute the processing of step S2406, step S2410, step S2413, step S2603, step S2608 and step S2611 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90). A gaming machine according to Feature A30, comprising:

  According to the feature A31, the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is changed from the game ball of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the situation that is not the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the incoming ball.

Feature A32. A reach mode is included as an execution mode of the variable display of the pattern,
The normal control means starts the reach mode with the passage of a period,
The gaming machine according to Feature A31, wherein the waiting control means starts the reach mode based on the fact that the number-of-times information has become information corresponding to the switching opportunity number.

  According to feature A32, in the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern is executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section, the reach mode is generated when the end of the standby section is approaching. Is possible. Therefore, the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in a situation that is not in the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display to be executed.

  Feature A33. The waiting control unit controls the picture display unit to display a stop result that can be stopped when the transition to the specific gaming state occurs when the number information reaches the end reference information. A gaming machine according to Feature A31 or A32.

  According to the feature A33, the stop display of the change display of the pattern when the predetermined game state is executed after the standby period is ended, and the change display of the pattern when the specific game state is ended and the predetermined game state is executed. It becomes possible to make it common with the stop result of. Therefore, the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in a situation that is not in the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display to be executed.

Feature A34. The predetermined entry means is:
A first predetermined entrance means (upper operating port 120) in which the ease of entry of the game ball does not vary according to the game state;
A second predetermined entry means (lower operation port 121) in which the ease of entry of the game ball varies according to the game state;
With
The number-of-times grasping means uses information corresponding to the total number of the number of game balls that have entered the first predetermined entry means and the number of game balls that have entered the second predetermined entry means as the number information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A28 to A33, characterized in that it is grasped.

  According to the feature A34, it is possible to diversify the types of predetermined pitching means to be updated of the number information.

  Feature A35. The variable entry means and the predetermined entry means are provided at positions where the entry of game balls can be aimed by the same launch operation mode in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A35, since the same launching operation mode may be used regardless of which of the variable entrance unit and the predetermined entrance unit is aimed, the launching operation mode is not complicated. It is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

  Feature A36. The gaming machine according to any one of features A27 to A35, wherein the predetermined event is that a gaming ball is supplied to the gaming area.

  According to the feature A36, since the predetermined end condition is satisfied when the number of game balls supplied to the game area becomes the number corresponding to the end reference information, the game content for satisfying the predetermined end condition is determined for the player. It becomes possible to make it easy.

  Feature A37. The gaming machine according to any one of features A27 to A36, wherein there are a plurality of types of termination reference information.

  According to the feature A37, there are a plurality of types of predetermined termination conditions for ending the waiting section so that relative advantages are different. Therefore, the player expects that a predetermined end condition with a high degree of advantage is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that one or more configurations of the features A1 to A37, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, and the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the configurations of the features A1 to A37. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 22) provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1004 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second and third embodiments, the main The function of executing the processing of step S1906 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the processing of step S3304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S3604),
In the specific gaming state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the closed state and is a predetermined gaming state (round) Predetermined generation means for generating a game (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the second and third embodiments, the function of step S2006 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; A function for executing the process, a function for executing the process of step S3405 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3706 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state (steps S1006 to S1009, steps S1019 to S1022 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function for executing the processing of steps S1313 to S1318, a function for executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2019 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments, and a main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S3414 to S3416 in the MPU 62 of the present invention, a function of executing the processes of steps S3715 and S3716 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth embodiment),
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a game ball being fired toward the game area in the standby section (first embodiment) In the second embodiment, the first release condition specifying process and the second release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 are executed. Function, a function of executing the release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3510 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment In the embodiment, a function of executing a release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, in the specific gaming state, the waiting section before the predetermined gaming state is started is terminated when a predetermined ending condition different from the lapse of the period is satisfied. As a result, a condition that is different from the lapse of the period is satisfied, so that it is possible to cause a situation in which the waiting section ends and the predetermined gaming state starts, and the configuration relating to the specific gaming state may be made novel. It becomes possible. Further, since it is necessary to fire a game ball toward the game area in order to end the standby section, it is possible to actively participate in the game even in the standby section.

Feature B2. The transition condition to the specific game state is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The feature B1 is characterized in that the probability that the predetermined end condition per unit game ball number is satisfied and the probability that the transition condition to the specific game state per unit game ball is satisfied are different. Game machines.

  According to the feature B2, in a configuration in which it is necessary to fire a game ball toward the game area regardless of which of the predetermined end condition and the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied, the predetermined number per unit game ball The probability that the end condition is satisfied is different from the probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit number of game balls is satisfied, so that the transition frequency to the specific gaming state and the end frequency of the waiting section are appropriately set. Can be made.

Feature B3. Predetermined ball entry means (game through through gate 24 in the first embodiment, upper operation port 120 and lower operation port 121 in the second embodiment) capable of entering the game ball flowing down the game area,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature B3, in order to end the waiting section, it is necessary to put the game ball into the predetermined pitching means, so that even in the waiting section, the player pays attention to the flow-down mode of the game ball in the gaming area. It becomes possible.

Feature B4. A specific entry means (a special-purpose through-gate 23) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
The game machine according to Feature B3, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific game state based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry unit.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to make different the entry means that should aim at entering in order to shift to the specific gaming state and the entry means that should aim at entering in order to end the waiting section. Thereby, it is possible to make different the ball entry means that the player pays attention to in each situation, while making the ball entry means to be aimed at in order to generate each situation clear to the player.

  Feature B5. The probability that the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the probability of being different is different.

  According to the feature B5, the probability that the predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry means, and the transition condition to the specific game state based on the game ball having entered the specific ball entry means. Since the probability of establishing is different, the transition frequency to the specific gaming state and the end frequency of the standby section can be made appropriate.

  Feature B6. In the feature B4 or B5, the predetermined entry means and the specific entry means are provided at positions where the entry of the game ball can be aimed by the same launch operation mode in the game area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature B6, the same launching operation mode may be used regardless of which of the predetermined entrance unit and the specific entrance unit is aimed, so that the launch operation mode is not complicated. It is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to aim at both the establishment of the condition for transitioning to the specific gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined end condition.

Feature B7. One of the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball in the game area with respect to the other,
At least the entrance means provided on the upstream side is a configuration in which the entered game ball continues to flow down the game area,
A game ball that has entered the entrance means provided on the upstream side can enter the entrance means provided on the downstream side of the predetermined entrance means and the specific entrance means. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to realize the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry means and the entry of the game ball into the specific entry means with one game ball. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the establishment of the condition for transitioning to the specific gaming state and the establishment of the predetermined termination condition at the same time.

Feature B8. The standby end means determines whether to end the standby section based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entrance means (steps S702 to S702 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). A function of executing the processing of S705)
The specific transition means determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means (steps S302 and S302 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). A function of executing the process of S303),
This game machine
First notification control means for controlling the first notification means (second display unit 34) so as to end the first operation in a notification state corresponding to the determination result of the standby end determination means after starting the first operation. (Function for executing the processing of step S205 to step S210 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
After starting the second operation, a second notification control unit that controls the second notification unit (first display unit 33) to end the second operation in a notification state corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination unit. A function of executing the processing of step S505 to step S509 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B7, wherein the first operation and the second operation can be executed at least partially overlapping each other.

  According to the feature B8, the first action and the second action can be executed at least partially overlapping each other, so that the transition to the specific gaming state occurs and the end condition of the waiting section is satisfied. It is possible to generate the situation that occurs early.

  Feature B9. The game machine according to Feature B3, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific game state based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry unit.

  According to the feature B9, the game ball may be entered into the predetermined entry means in any of the case where the condition for transitioning to the specific game state is satisfied and the case where the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the game content for the player easy to understand.

  Feature B10. Conditions for satisfying the predetermined end condition based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and conditions for transitioning to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein a condition for satisfying is different.

  According to the feature B10, each condition is satisfied in a configuration in which the game ball may be entered into the predetermined entry means in both cases where the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. By making the conditions for making them different, it is possible to make the game contents for satisfying each condition easy to understand for the player while preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Feature B11. The predetermined end condition is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area in the standby section, and a game ball is launched toward the game area in a situation different from the standby section. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, which is not established.

  According to the feature B11, in order to end the standby section, it is necessary to fire a game ball toward the game area in the standby section. Thereby, it becomes possible to positively perform the launch operation in the standby section.

  Note that one or more configurations of the features A1 to A37, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, and the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B11. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 22) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1004 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second and third embodiments, the main The function of executing the processing of step S1906 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the processing of step S3304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S3604),
In the specific gaming state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the closed state and is a predetermined gaming state (round) Predetermined generation means for generating a game (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the second and third embodiments, the function of step S2006 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; A function for executing the process, a function for executing the process of step S3405 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3706 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state (steps S1006 to S1009, steps S1019 to S1022 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function for executing the processing of steps S1313 to S1318, a function for executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2019 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments, and a main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S3414 to S3416 in the MPU 62 of the present invention, a function of executing the processes of steps S3715 and S3716 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth embodiment),
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined end condition different from the passage of the period is satisfied in the standby section (in the first embodiment, the step in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) A function for executing the processing of S1009 to S1018, a function for executing the first release condition specifying process and the second release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, and a main function in the third embodiment The function of executing the release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the process of step S3510 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment Function to execute the release condition identification process),
Information on the number of times of execution of the predetermined game state that can be executed without causing the standby section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied in the specific game state at the time of the end is stored as a number storage means (the second round counter in the first embodiment). RC2, storage execution means for storing in the round counter RC in the second and third embodiments (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the round number specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second embodiment, A function of executing the processing of step S1906, step S2310 and step S2520 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a function of executing the processing of step S3114 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the third embodiment),
When the information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means in the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is generated without causing the waiting section that requires the predetermined termination condition to be satisfied at the end. Means for executing the processing of steps S1303 and S1315 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment, and in steps S2004 and S2018 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments. Processing function), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the waiting section before the predetermined gaming state is started in the specific gaming state is ended when a predetermined ending condition different from the passage of the period is satisfied. As a result, a condition that is different from the lapse of the period is satisfied, so that it is possible to cause a situation in which the waiting section ends and the predetermined gaming state starts, and the configuration relating to the specific gaming state may be made novel. It becomes possible.

  When information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means, the predetermined gaming state is executed without causing a waiting section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied at the end. As a result, the player expects information corresponding to a large number of executions to be stored in the number storage means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature C2. The storage execution means stores information on the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state that can be executed without causing the standby section that requires the predetermined end condition to be satisfied when the storage trigger occurs. The game machine according to the feature C1, wherein the information on the determined number of executions is stored in the number storage means.

  According to the feature C2, there is a plurality of types of information on the number of executions to be stored in the number storage means when a storage trigger occurs. It is possible to diversify the number of times the predetermined gaming state is executed without being pinched.

  Feature C3. Profit granting means (in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that gives a predetermined profit when one specific gaming state ends in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of one or more is stored in the number storage means The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, further including a function of executing the processing of steps S2701 to S2703.

  According to the feature C3, a predetermined profit is given when one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means. Attention will be paid not only to the number of executions of the gaming state but also whether or not the situation occurs.

  Feature C4. The profit granting means has one or more executions in the number-of-times storage means rather than a case where one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution numbers is not stored in the number-of-times storage means. The feature C3 is characterized in that the next specific game state is more likely to occur when one specific game state ends in a situation where information corresponding to the number of times is stored. Game machines.

  According to the feature C4, the next specific game state is likely to occur when one specific game state is ended in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of 1 or more is stored in the number storage means. When this situation occurs, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the predetermined gaming state.

  Feature C5. When one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, it corresponds to one or more execution times stored in the number storage means. A gaming machine according to the feature C3 or C4, characterized by comprising erasing means for erasing information (a function of executing the processing of step S1914 and step S1915 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60).

  According to the feature C5, when one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, a predetermined profit is given, while the number of executions The information corresponding to is deleted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having an extremely high degree of advantage over the occurrence of the situation.

  Feature C6. In a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, and when one specific gaming state is completed, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the information stored in the number storage means The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the digestion of the game occurs in the new specific gaming state.

  According to the feature C6, even if one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means, the information corresponding to the number of executions is the next specific game. Takes over to the state. Thus, in the specific game state, the player expects information corresponding to a larger number of executions to be stored in the number storage means regardless of the progress of the specific game state.

Feature C7. It has a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
The predetermined termination condition is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The transition condition to the specific game state is established based on a game ball being launched toward the game area,
The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit number of game balls is satisfied is higher than the probability that the predetermined end condition per unit number of game balls is satisfied.

  According to the feature C7, the probability that the transition condition to the specific gaming state per unit number of game balls is satisfied is higher than the probability that the predetermined end condition per number of unit game balls is satisfied. Even if one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions is stored, the specific gaming state can be restarted early.

Feature C8. Opening control means (step S1015 to step S1015 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the first embodiment) that the opening effect is executed before the transition to the specific gaming state and the first predetermined gaming state is started. S1016 and a function of executing steps S1020 to S1022, a function of executing the processes of steps S2021 to S2023 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second and third embodiments)
The waiting section includes an intermediate waiting section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state of the next execution time after the predetermined gaming state of a predetermined execution time is completed in one specific gaming state,
In the feature C6 or C7, the opening control unit is configured to execute the opening effect even when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the predetermined gaming state is started in the midway waiting section. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C8, the predetermined game state is started either when the specific game state is newly started and the predetermined game state is started, or when the predetermined waiting state is ended and the predetermined game state is started. The opening effect is executed before the start of the event. Thereby, even if the predetermined gaming state is started in any of these situations, it is possible to make the player think that the predetermined gaming state has started in the same manner.

  Feature C9. The opening control means generates a new specific game state when one specific game state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to one or more execution times is stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine according to C8, wherein the opening effect is not executed when the predetermined gaming state is started based on information stored in the number storage unit.

  According to the feature C9, when one specific gaming state is completed in a situation where information corresponding to the number of executions of one or more is stored in the number storage means, a predetermined gaming state is generated by the occurrence of the next specific gaming state. When the game is started, the opening effect is not executed, which may cause the player to think that a series of specific game states has occurred even though a new specific game state has actually started. It becomes possible.

  Feature C10. Any one of the features C1 to C9, wherein the storage execution unit stores the information on the number of executions in the number storage unit when a storage trigger occurs even in a situation different from the standby section. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C10, since the information on the number of executions may be stored in the number-of-times storage unit even in a situation different from the standby section, a situation in which the information on the number of executions is stored in the number-of-times storage unit is generated. It becomes easy.

  Note that one or more configurations of the features A1 to A37, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, and the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the configurations of the features C1 to C10. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 22) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1004 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, in the second and third embodiments, the main The function of executing the processing of step S1906 in the MPU 62 of the control device 60, the function of executing the processing of step S3304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the fifth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S3604),
In the specific gaming state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the closed state and is a predetermined gaming state (round) Predetermined generation means for generating a game (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1304 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; in the second and third embodiments, the function of step S2006 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60; A function for executing the process, a function for executing the process of step S3405 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S3706 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state (steps S1006 to S1009, steps S1019 to S1022 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function for executing the processing of steps S1313 to S1318, a function for executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2019 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in the second and third embodiments, and a main control device 60 in the fourth embodiment. A function of executing the processes of steps S3414 to S3416 in the MPU 62 of the present invention, a function of executing the processes of steps S3715 and S3716 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the fifth embodiment),
Number-of-times grasping means for grasping the number of times that a predetermined event has occurred based on the fact that a game ball has been launched toward the game area as number information (in the second embodiment, the processing in steps S1504 and S1508 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3004, step S3008, step S3012 and step S3017 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the number-of-times information has reached end reference information in the standby section (step S1009 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the first embodiment) A function for executing the process of step S1018, a function for executing the first release condition specifying process and the second release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 in the second embodiment, and a main control in the third embodiment A function for executing the release condition specifying process in the MPU 62 of the apparatus 60, a function for executing the process of step S3510 in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fourth embodiment, and a release in the MPU 62 of the main control apparatus 60 in the fifth embodiment. Function to execute condition identification processing), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the waiting section ends when the number of times that the predetermined event has occurred based on the game ball being launched in the gaming area reaches the number corresponding to the end reference information, the player in the waiting section The game ball will continue to be fired and the number of occurrences of the predetermined event will be noted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the standby section.

Feature D2. Predetermined entrance means (upper operating port 120 and lower operating port 121) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game machine according to Feature D1, wherein the predetermined event is a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature D2, since the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means in the standby section becomes the number corresponding to the end reference information, the standby section ends, so in the standby section, the player simply plays the game ball. In addition to firing, attention is paid to whether or not a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means.

  Feature D3. The game machine according to Feature D2, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific game state based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry unit.

  According to the feature D3, in order to satisfy each condition, it is only necessary to enter the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in any of the case where the transition condition to the specific game state is satisfied and the case where the standby section is ended. It is possible to make the game content easy to understand for the player.

Feature D4. The specific transition means determines whether or not to shift to the specific game state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (the process of step S1705 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60). Function to execute)
This game machine
A pattern display means (pattern display device 31) for variably displaying the pattern;
The pattern display control means (step S1801 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90) that controls the picture display means to display the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the change display of the picture is started. To the function of executing the process of step S1806),
With
The design display control means is a standby control means for controlling the design display means so that the display of the change of the design is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entry means in the standby section. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, further comprising a function of executing a first release period handling process in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

  According to the feature D4, since the display of the pattern is changed by the pattern display means even in the standby section, the situation that is not the specific gaming state and the situation that is the standby section are made to be recognized as the same situation. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the opportunity to start the predetermined game state while keeping the game content of the player until the predetermined game state is generated.

Feature D5. The pattern display control means includes normal control means for changing the execution mode of the variation display of the pattern as time passes when the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination unit is performed. ,
The waiting control means, when causing the predetermined ball entering means to display the variation of the pattern based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the standby section, the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means. Based on the above, means for changing the execution mode of the variation display of the pattern (function to execute the processing of step S2406, step S2410, step S2413, step S2603, step S2608 and step S2611 in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90). A gaming machine according to Feature D4, comprising the gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, the execution mode of the display of the variation of the pattern executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is changed to the state of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the situation that is not the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the incoming ball.

Feature D6. A reach mode is included as an execution mode of the variable display of the pattern,
The normal control means starts the reach mode with the passage of a period,
The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein the waiting control means starts the reach mode based on the fact that the number-of-times information has become information corresponding to the number of switching opportunities.

  According to the feature D6, in the configuration in which the change display of the pattern is executed based on the game ball entering the predetermined entry means in the standby section, the reach mode is generated when the end of the standby section is approaching. Is possible. Therefore, the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in a situation that is not in the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display to be executed.

  Feature D7. The waiting control unit controls the picture display unit to display a stop result that can be stopped when the transition to the specific gaming state occurs when the number information reaches the end reference information. The gaming machine according to Feature D5 or D6, wherein

  According to the feature D7, the change display of the pattern when the predetermined game state is executed after the standby period is ended, and the change display of the pattern when the specific game state is ended and the predetermined game state is executed are displayed. It becomes possible to make it common with the stop result of. Therefore, the execution mode of the pattern change display executed based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in the standby section is based on the entrance of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means in a situation that is not in the specific game state. It is possible to resemble the execution mode of the pattern change display to be executed.

Feature D8. The predetermined entry means is:
A first predetermined entrance means (upper operating port 120) in which the ease of entry of the game ball does not vary according to the game state;
A second predetermined entry means (lower operation port 121) in which the ease of entry of the game ball varies according to the game state;
With
The number-of-times grasping means uses information corresponding to the total number of the number of game balls that have entered the first predetermined entry means and the number of game balls that have entered the second predetermined entry means as the number information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, characterized by grasping.

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to diversify the types of the predetermined pitching means to be updated for the number information.

  Feature D9. The variable entry means and the predetermined entry means are provided at positions where the entry of game balls can be aimed by the same launch operation mode in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D9, the same launching operation mode may be used regardless of which of the variable entrance unit and the predetermined entrance unit is aimed, so that the launching operation mode is not complicated. It is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

  Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the predetermined event is that a gaming ball is supplied to the gaming area.

  According to the feature D10, since the waiting section ends when the number of game balls supplied to the gaming area becomes the number corresponding to the end reference information, it is easy for the player to play the game content for ending the waiting section. It becomes possible.

  Feature D11. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D10, wherein a plurality of types of the end reference information exist.

  According to the feature D11, there are a plurality of types of conditions for ending the waiting section so that relative advantages are different. Therefore, the player expects that a condition having a high degree of advantage is selected, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that one or more configurations of the features A1 to A37, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, and the features D1 to D11 may be applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D11. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, and the feature D group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. Specifically, for a pachinko machine, a configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained in a lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, a transition is made to a specific gaming state. And when it transfers to a specific game state, for example, opening and closing of the pitching apparatus provided in the game area is started.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration relating to the specific gaming state novel, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the starting operation means, and resulting from the operation of the stop operation means Or a game machine that suspends variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined time and gives a player a privilege according to the picture after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 22 ... Variable prize-winning device, 23 ... Special-purpose through-gate, 24 ... Game-through through-gate, 31 ... Symbol display device, 60 ... Main control device, 62 ... MPU, 81 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 90 ... Sound emission control Device: 92 ... MPU, 130: Extension button, 100 ... Display control device, 102 ... MPU, 120 ... Upper working port, 121 ... Lower working port

Claims (10)

Variable pitching means provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the specific gaming state;
In the specific game state, when the variable entry means is in the open state and the closing condition is satisfied, a predetermined game state is generated in which the variable entry means is in the closed state and ends. Predetermined generating means for causing,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Standby setting means for setting a standby section for waiting for the start of the predetermined gaming state in the specific gaming state;
Number-of-times grasping means for grasping the number of times that a predetermined event has occurred based on the fact that a game ball has been launched toward the game area as number-of-times information;
Standby end means for ending the standby section and starting the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the number-of-times information has reached end reference information in the standby section;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A predetermined ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined event is that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.   3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the specific transition unit establishes a transition condition to the specific game state based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry unit. The specific transition means includes a transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state based on a game ball entering the predetermined pitching means,
This game machine
A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern;
A pattern display control means for controlling the pattern display means to display a stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after starting the variation display of the pattern;
With
The picture display control means includes a standby control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture change display is executed based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in the standby section. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is provided. The pattern display control means includes normal control means for changing the execution mode of the variation display of the pattern as time passes when the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination unit is performed. ,
The waiting control means, when causing the predetermined ball entering means to display the variation of the pattern based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means in the standby section, the game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, further comprising means for changing an execution mode of the change display of the pattern based on the above. A reach mode is included as an execution mode of the variable display of the pattern,
The normal control means starts the reach mode with the passage of a period,
6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the waiting control means starts the reach mode based on the fact that the number-of-times information has become information corresponding to the switching opportunity number.   The waiting control unit controls the picture display unit to display a stop result that can be stopped when the transition to the specific gaming state occurs when the number information reaches the end reference information. The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6, characterized in that. The predetermined entry means is:
A first predetermined ball entry means in which the ease of entering a game ball does not vary depending on the game state;
A second predetermined entry means for changing the ease of entry of the game ball according to the game state;
With
The number-of-times grasping means uses information corresponding to the total number of the number of game balls that have entered the first predetermined entry means and the number of game balls that have entered the second predetermined entry means as the number information. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is grasped.   9. The variable entry means and the predetermined entry means are provided at positions where the entry of a game ball can be aimed by the same launch operation mode in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined event is that a game ball is supplied to the game area.

Images